SAMSUNG VP-D3840, VP-D384, VP-D3810, VP-D381 User Manual

VP-D381( i )

VP-D382H

VP-D384

VP-D382( i )

VP-D385( i )

Digital Video Camcorder

user manual

imagine the possibilities

Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product. To receive more complete service, please register

your product at

www.samsung.com/global/register

數位視訊攝

錄放影機

使用者手冊

想像可能

感謝您購買Samsung 產品。要獲得更為全面的服務、

請透過以下網站註冊產品

www.samsung.com/global/register

key features of your miniDV camcorder

FEATURES OF YOUR NEW MINIDV CAMCORDER

Digital Data Transfer Function with IEEE1394

By incorporating the IEEE 1394 (i.LINK™: i.LINK is a serial data transfer protocol and interconnectivity system, used to transmit DV data) high speed data transport port, both moving and photo images can be transferred to a PC, making it possible to produce or edit various images.

USB Interface for Digital Image Data Transfer (VP-D385( i ) only)

You can transfer images to a PC using the USB interface without an add-on card.

Tape Photo Recording on a Tape

Tape photo

recording makes it possible to record a photo image on a tape.

800K pixel CCD (VP-D385( i ) only)

Your camcorder incorporates a 800K pixel CCD. Photo images can be recorded to a memory card.

1200x Digital Zoom

Allows you to magnify an image up to 1200 times its original size.

Audio Enhancement

Provides more powerful sound with the Real Stereo and Audio Effect features.

Colour TFT LCD

A high-resolution colour TFT LCD gives you clean, sharp images as well as the ability to review your recordings immediately.

ii_ English

Digital Image Stabilizer (DIS)

The DIS compensates for any hand shaking, reducing unstable images

particularly at high magnication.

Various Visual Effects

The Visual Effects allow you to give

your lms a special look by adding

various special effects.

Back Light Compensation (BLC)

The BLC function compensates for a bright background behind a subject you're recording.

Program AE

The Program AE enables you to alter the shutter speed and aperture to suit

the type of scene/action to be lmed.

High Power Zoom Lens

Power Zoom lens allows users to magnify the subject clearly up to 34x.

Digital Still Camera Function (VP-D385( i ) only)

Using memory card, you can

•

easily record and playback standard photo images. You can transfer standard photo

•

images on the memory card to your PC using the USB interface.

Moving Image Recording on a Memory Card (VP-D385( i ) only)

Moving image recording makes it possible to record video onto a memory card.

MMC/SD card slot (VP-D385( i ) only)

MMC/SD card slot can use MMC (Multi Media Cards) and SD cards.

miniDV

攝錄放影機的主要功能

新MINIDV攝錄放影機的功能



使用IEEE1394數位資料傳輸功能

透過結合 IEEE 1394（i.LINK™：i.LINK 是一系列資料傳輸通訊協定和內部連接系統、通常用於傳遞 DV 資料）高速資料傳輸連接埠、可以將動態和相片影像傳輸到電腦、以便製作或編輯各種影像。

用於傳輸數位影像資料的USB介面

(

VP-D385( i ))

僅適用於

您可以使用 USB 介面將影像傳輸到電腦、而不需要附加介面卡。

錄影帶上的錄影帶相片錄製

錄影帶相片錄製使得在錄影帶上錄製相片影像成為可能。

680K像素CCD

(

VP-D385( i ))

僅適用於

您的攝錄放影機配備一台 680K 像素 CCD。可將相片影像錄製到記憶卡上。

1200

倍數位縮放

可以讓您將影像放大至其原始大小的 1200 倍

聲訊增強

透過逼真立體聲和聲訊效果功能提供更強大的音效。

TFT LCD

彩色

高解析度彩色亮、清晰影像、同時具有立即檢視錄影畫面的功能。

數位影像防手震功能

可補償因手持拍攝時手抖而引起

DIS

的影像晃動、尤其是在較高的放大倍數下。

TFT LCD

(DIS)

可為您提供明

（多媒體卡）和

各種視訊效果

視訊效果可添加各種特殊效果、讓所拍攝的影像別具一格。

(BLC)

背光補償

功能可以補償您所錄製的主體背

BLC

後的明亮背景。

Program AE

程式自動曝光可以讓您改變快門速度和光圈、以適合所拍攝的場景 / 動作類型。

高功能縮放鏡頭

高功能縮放鏡頭可以讓使用者清楚地將主體放大至 34 倍。

數位靜態相機功能

(

VP-D385( i ))

僅適用於

您可以使用記憶卡輕鬆地錄製和

•

播放標準相片影像。您可以使用

•

影像從記憶卡傳輸到電腦。

將影像錄製移至記憶卡

(

僅適用於

動態影像錄製可將視訊錄製到記憶卡。

MMC/SD (

僅適用於

MMC/SD

介面將標準相片

USB

VP-D385( i ))

卡插槽

VP-D385( i ))

卡插槽能夠使用

卡。

SD

MMC

臺灣 _ii

safety warnings

What the icons and signs in this user manual mean :

安全警告

本使用者手冊中圖示和標誌的含義：

WARNING

CAUTION

These warning signs are here to prevent injury to you and others. Please follow them explicitly. After reading this section, keep it in a safe place for future reference.

Means that death or serious personal injury is a risk.

Means that there is a potential risk for personal injury or material damage.

To reduce the risk of re, explosion, electric shock,

or personal injury when using your camcorder, follow these basic safety precautions:

Means hints or referential pages that may be helpful when operating the camcorder.

precautions

Warning!

This camcorder should always be connected to an AC outlet

•

with a protective grounding connection. Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as

•

sunshine, re or the like.

Caution

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type.

To disconnect the apparatus from the mains, the plug must be

pulled out from the mains socket, therefore the mains plug shall

iii_ English

be readily operable.

警告

注意

在此提供這些警告圖示可避免對您及他人造成傷害。請嚴格遵循。在閱讀本部分之後、請將其妥善保管以供日後參考。

表示有造成死亡或嚴重傷害的危險。

表示有潛在的人員傷害或材料損毀之危險。

在使用攝錄放影機時、要降低火災、爆炸、觸電或人身傷害的危險、請遵循下面這些基本安全注意事項：

表示可能有助於操作攝錄放影機的提示或參考頁。

注意事項

此攝錄放影機應總是與帶有保護接地連接的交流電源插座連接。

•

不應將電池放在太陽底下或火爐旁邊等高熱地方。

•

若沒有正確更換電池、將會有爆炸的危險。

要從本機主電源斷開本裝置、必須從主電源插座上拔下插頭、因此

警告！

注意

請使用相同類型的電池來更換

主電源插頭應該易於操作。

臺灣 _iii

notes and safety

請小心旋轉

導致連接

1.

2.

AV

DV

B A

T T

.

M

E

N

U

W

T

M

O

D

E

PO

W

E

R

C

H

G

instructions

NOTES REGARDING THE VIDEO HEAD CLEANING

To ensure normal recording and a clear picture, clean the video

•

heads regularly. If a square block-shape distorts playback, or only a blue screen is displayed, the video heads may be dirty. If this happens, clean the video heads with a dry type cleaning cassette. Do not use a wet-type cleaning cassette. It may damage the video heads.

•

ADJUSTING THE LCD SCREEN

Please rotate the LCD screen carefully as illustrated. Over rotation may cause damage to the inside of the hinge that connects the LCD screen to the camcorder.

1.

Open the LCD screen 90 degrees from the

camcorder with your  nger

2. Rotate it to the best angle to record or play.

- If you rotate the LCD screen 180 degrees so it is facing forward, you can close the LCD screen with the display facing out.

- This is convenient during playback operations.

Refer to page 31 to adjust brightness and colour of the LCD screen.

NOTES REGARDING THE LCD SCREEN

Direct sunlight can damage the LCD screen, the inside of the the Lens.

•

Take pictures of the sun only in low light conditions, such as at dusk. The LCD screen has been manufactured using high precision

•

technology. However, there may be tiny dots (red, blue or green in colour) that appear on the LCD screen. These dots are normal and do not affect the recorded picture in any way. Do not pick up the camcorder by holding the LCD screen or battery pack.

•

.

注意事項和安全說明

有關清潔磁頭的注意事項

若要確保正常錄製清晰相片、請經常清潔磁頭。

•

若出現馬賽克失真、或僅顯示藍色螢幕、視訊磁頭可能骯髒。若發生此情況、請使用乾式清潔磁帶來清潔視訊磁頭。請勿使用濕式清潔帶。它可能會損壞視訊磁頭。

•

LCD

調整

有關

•

螢幕

請小心旋轉導致連接

請用手指開啟

1.

角。將它旋轉至錄製或播放的最佳角度。

2.

-

如需關於調整

LCD

陽光直射會損壞攝太陽的相片、譬如黃昏

螢幕是採用高精密技術製造的。

LCD

點（紅色、藍色或綠色）。這些小點屬於正常現象、不會影嚮錄製的影像。切勿以握住

LCD

螢幕和鏡頭的注意事項

螢幕、透鏡內部。請僅在光線微弱的情況下拍

LCD

螢幕或電池組的方式拿起攝錄放影機。

LCD

螢幕、如圖所示。過度旋轉可能

LCD

螢幕和攝錄放影機的鉸鏈內部損毀。

LCD

螢幕與攝錄放影機呈 90 度

LCD

如果您將您可以關閉面朝外的

螢幕旋轉 180 度至面向前、

LCD

螢幕。

這樣在播放操作時會比較方便。

螢幕的亮度和色彩的資訊、請參閱第 31 頁。

螢幕上可能會出現一些小

LCD

iv_ English

臺灣 _iv

臺灣 _v

v_ English

維修和更換零件

切勿嘗試自行維修本攝錄放影機。打開或移除機蓋可能會讓您暴露在危險電壓或其他危險中。請讓合格的專業技術人員進行維修。在需要更換零件時、請確保維修技術人員使用製造商指定的更換零件、其特性與原始零件相同。未經授權的更換可能會導致火災、觸電或其他危險。

有關攝錄放影機的注意事項

切勿將攝錄放影機暴露在高溫下（超過

60 °C 或 140 °F

）。

例如、在陽光下停放的車內或陽光直射之下。

切勿讓攝錄放影機受潮。將攝錄放影機遠離雨水、海水、以及任何

其他形態的濕氣。若攝錄放影機受潮、將會損壞。本機受潮所導致的損壞有時可能無法修理。

突然升高的氣溫將導致本攝錄放影機內部形成濕氣凝結。

- 當您將攝錄放影機從寒冷的地方帶入溫暖的地方（如、冬天時從戶外帶入室內）。

- 當您將攝錄放影機從涼爽的地方帶入炎熱的地方（如、夏天時從室內帶出戶外）。

若啟動

(DEW) 保護功能、請將攝錄放影機放在乾燥溫暖的室內

至少兩個小時、並打開錄影帶座和取出電池組。

要從本機主電源斷開本裝置、必須從主電源插座上拔下插頭、因此

主電源插頭應該易於操作。

•

有關著作權的注意事項

若要確保正常錄製清晰相片、請經常清潔磁頭。若出現馬賽克失真、或僅顯示藍色螢幕、視訊磁頭可能骯髒。若發生此情況、請使用乾式清潔磁帶來清潔視訊磁頭。

NOTICES REGARDING COPYRIGHT

To ensure normal recording and a clear picture, clean the video heads regularly. If a square block-shape distorts playback, or only a blue screen is displayed, the video heads may be dirty. If this happens, clean the video heads with a dry type cleaning cassette.

SERVICING & REPLACEMENT PARTS

Do not attempt to service this camcorder yourself. Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards.

Refer all servicing to qualied service personnel.

When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has

used replacement parts specied by the manufacturer and having the

same characteristics as the original part.

Unauthorised substitutions may result in re, electric shock or other hazards.

NOTES REGARDING CAMCORDER

Do not leave the camcorder exposed to high temperatures (above 60 °C or 140 °F). For example, in a parked car in the sun or exposed to direct sunlight. Do not let the camcorder get wet. Keep the camcorder away from rain, sea water, and any other form of moisture. If the camcorder gets wet, it may get damaged. Sometimes a malfunction due to exposure to liquids cannot be repaired. A sudden rise in atmospheric temperature may cause condensation to form inside the camcorder.

- When you move the camcorder from a cold location to a warm location (e.g. from outside to inside during the winter.)

- When you move the camcorder from a cool location to a hot location (e.g. from inside to outside during the summer.)

If the

(DEW) protection feature is activated, leave the camcorder for at least two hours in a dry, warm room with the cassette compartment opened and the battery pack removed. To disconnect the apparatus from the mains, the plug must be pulled out from the mains socket, therefore the mains plug shall be readily operable.

•

臺灣 _v

v_ English

維修和更換零件

切勿嘗試自行維修本攝錄放影機。打開或移除機蓋可能會讓您暴露在危險電壓或其他危險中。請讓合格的專業技術人員進行維修。在需要更換零件時、請確保維修技術人員使用製造商指定的更換零件、其特性與原始零件相同。未經授權的更換可能會導致火災、觸電或其他危險。

有關攝錄放影機的注意事項

切勿將攝錄放影機暴露在高溫下（超過

60 °C 或 140 °F

）。

例如、在陽光下停放的車內或陽光直射之下。

切勿讓攝錄放影機受潮。將攝錄放影機遠離雨水、海水、以及任何

其他形態的濕氣。若攝錄放影機受潮、將會損壞。本機受潮所導致的損壞有時可能無法修理。

突然升高的氣溫將導致本攝錄放影機內部形成濕氣凝結。

- 當您將攝錄放影機從寒冷的地方帶入溫暖的地方（如、冬天時從戶外帶入室內）。

- 當您將攝錄放影機從涼爽的地方帶入炎熱的地方（如、夏天時從室內帶出戶外）。

若啟動

(DEW) 保護功能、請將攝錄放影機放在乾燥溫暖的室內

至少兩個小時、並打開錄影帶座和取出電池組。

要從本機主電源斷開本裝置、必須從主電源插座上拔下插頭、因此

主電源插頭應該易於操作。

•

有關著作權的注意事項

若要確保正常錄製清晰相片、請經常清潔磁頭。若出現馬賽克失真、或僅顯示藍色螢幕、視訊磁頭可能骯髒。若發生此情況、請使用乾式清潔磁帶來清潔視訊磁頭。

NOTICES REGARDING COPYRIGHT

To ensure normal recording and a clear picture, clean the video heads regularly. If a square block-shape distorts playback, or only a blue screen is displayed, the video heads may be dirty. If this happens, clean the video heads with a dry type cleaning cassette.

SERVICING & REPLACEMENT PARTS

Do not attempt to service this camcorder yourself. Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards.

Refer all servicing to qualied service personnel.

When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has

used replacement parts specied by the manufacturer and having the

same characteristics as the original part.

Unauthorised substitutions may result in re, electric shock or other hazards.

NOTES REGARDING CAMCORDER

Do not leave the camcorder exposed to high temperatures (above 60 °C or 140 °F). For example, in a parked car in the sun or exposed to direct sunlight. Do not let the camcorder get wet. Keep the camcorder away from rain, sea water, and any other form of moisture. If the camcorder gets wet, it may get damaged. Sometimes a malfunction due to exposure to liquids cannot be repaired. A sudden rise in atmospheric temperature may cause condensation to form inside the camcorder.

- When you move the camcorder from a cold location to a warm location (e.g. from outside to inside during the winter.)

- When you move the camcorder from a cool location to a hot location (e.g. from inside to outside during the summer.)

If the

(DEW) protection feature is activated, leave the camcorder for at least two hours in a dry, warm room with the cassette compartment opened and the battery pack removed. To disconnect the apparatus from the mains, the plug must be pulled out from the mains socket, therefore the mains plug shall be readily operable.

•

02_ English

臺灣 _02

contents

GETTING TO KNOW

YOUR MINIDV CAMCORDER

06

PREPARATION

12

INITIAL SETTING :

SYSTEM MENU

SETTING

24

06 What is included with your miniDV

camcorder 07 Front & left view 08 Left side view 09 Right & top view 10 Rear & bottom view 11 Using the remote control

(VP-D382

( i )

/D382H/D385

12 Using the hand strap & lens cover 13 Installing the button-type battery 14 Using the battery pack 17 Connecting a power source

Basic miniDV camcorder operation

18 19 Screen indicators in Camera/

Player modes

Screen indicators in M.Cam/M.Player

20

modes (VP-D385( i ) only) 21 Using the display ( ) button 22 Using the joystick 22 Handling quick menus with the

joystick

24 Setting the clock (Clock set) 25 Setting the wireless remote

control acceptance (Remote)

(VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ) only) 26 Setting the beep sound

(Beep Sound) 27 Setting the shutter sound

(Shutter Sound) 28 Selecting the OSD language

(Language) 29 Viewing the demonstration

(Demonstration)

( i )

only)

了解您的MINIDV攝

錄放影機

06

準備工作

12

起始設定：系統選

單設定

24

06 您的 miniDV 攝錄放影機的隨附物

件 07 正視圖和左視圖 08 左視圖 09 右視圖和頂視圖 10 後視圖和底視圖 11 使用遙控器（僅適用於

VP-D382

( i )

/D382H/D385

12 使用手提帶和透鏡蓋 13 安裝鈕扣電池 14 使用電池組 17 連接電源

miniDV 攝錄放影機的基本操作

18 19

Camera/Player 模式下的螢幕指示器 20

M.Cam/M.Player 模式下的螢幕指示

器（僅適用於 21 使用顯示 ( )按鈕

Joystick

22 使用

Joystick 操作快速選單

22 使用

24 設定時鐘 (Clock set) 25 設定無線遙控器接收 (Remote)

（僅適用於

26 設定嗶聲 (Beep Sound) 27 設定快門聲音 (Shutter Sound) 28 選擇 29 檢視示範畫面 (

VP-D382

D385

( i )

)

OSD 語言 (Language)

VP-D385( i )

( i )

/D382H/

Demonstration)

( i )

)

臺灣 _03

03_ English

INITIAL SETTING :

DISPLAY MENU

SETTING

BASIC RECORDING

34

ADVANCED

RECORDING

44

30 Setting the guideline (Guideline) 31 Adjusting the

(LCD Bright/LCD Colour) Displaying the date/time (Date/Time)

32 33 Setting the tv display (TV display)

34 Inserting / ejecting a cassette 34 Various recording techniques

35 Making your rst recording

Recording with ease for beginners

36

(EASY.Q mode) 37 Zooming in and out 38 Searching quickly for a desired

scene (Setting the zero memory)

(VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ) only) 39 Self record using the remote control

(Setting the Self Timer)

(VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ) only) 40 Reviewing and searching a recording 41 Using the fade on and off 42 Auto focus / manual focus

Setting the shutter speed & exposure

43

44

Selecting the record mode & audio

mode (Rec Mode & Audio Mode) 45

Cutting off wind noise (WindCut Plus) 46 Selecting the real stereo function

(Real Stereo)

Setting the program ae (Program AE)

47 49 Setting the white balance

(White Balance) 51 Applying visual effects

(Visual Effect) 53 Setting the 16:9 wide mode

(16:9 Wide) 54 Using the tele macro (

LCD screen

Macro)

起始設定：顯示選

單設定

基本錄製

34

進階錄製

44

30 設定導向圖 (Guideline)

LCD 螢幕 (LCD Bright/LCD

31 調整

Colour)

顯示日期/時間 (Date/Time)

32 33 設定電視螢幕顯示 (TV display)

34 插入/彈出錄影帶 34 各種錄製技巧 35 進行您的第一次錄製

初學者可輕鬆地進行錄製

36

（EASY.Q 模式）

37 放大和縮小

快速搜尋所需的場景（設定零記憶）

38

（僅適用於

39 使用遙控器自行錄製（設定

Timer)(僅適用於 VP-D382 D382H/

40 檢視和搜尋錄製 41 使用淡化開啟和關閉功能

Auto focus / manual focus

42

設定 shutter speed 和 exposure

43

44

選擇錄製模式和音訊模式（錄製模式和音訊模式）

45

消除風聲 (WindCut Plus)

46 選擇逼真立體聲功能 (Real Stereo)

設定程序自動曝光 (Program AE)

47 49 設定白平衡 (White Balance) 51 套用視訊效果 ( 53 設定 16:9 寬螢幕模式 ( 54 使用望遠微距 (

D385( i ))

VP-D382( i )/

Visual Effect)

16:9 wide)

Macro)

D382H/

Self

( i )

/

04_ English

臺灣 _04

contents

PLAYBACK

62

CONNECTION

68

DIGITAL STILL

CAMERA MODE

(VP-D385( i ) ONLY)

74

55 Setting the digital image stabilizer

(DIS) 56 Using back light compensation mode

(BLC) 57 Zooming in and out with digital zoom

(Digital Zoom) 58 Using the colour nite ( 59 Using the light (Light)

(VP-D382

( i )

only)

60 Recording a photo image on a tape

-tape photo recording

61 Searching for a photo image on a

tape (Photo Search)

62

Playing back a tape on the LCD screen 63

Various functions while in Player mode 65 Audio dubbing

(VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ) only) 66

Dubbed audio playback (Audio Select) 67 Audio effect

68 Setting the AV in/out (AV In/Out)

(VP-D381i/D382i/D385i only) 69 Tape playing back on a 71 Copying a camcorder tape onto a

video tape 72 Using the 73

74 Using a memory card (usable

75 Structure of folders and les on the

77 Setting the le number (File No.)

78 Taking a photo image (

79 Viewing photo images ( 80

81

VOICE+ function Recording (copying) a TV programme or video tape onto a camcorder tape (VP-D381i/D382i/D385i only)

memory card) (not supplied)

memory card

Protection from accidental erasure (Protect) Deleting photo images and moving images (Delete)

C.Nite)

/D382H/D384/D385

TV screen

JPEG) on the

JPEG)

數位靜態相機模式

（僅適用於

VP-D385( i ))

55 設定數位影像防手震功能 (DIS) 56 使用背光補償模式 ( 57 使用數位縮放來放大和縮小 (

Zoom) 58 使用彩色夜景 ( 59 使用燈 (

VP-D382

60 在雙面錄影帶相片錄製上錄製相片影

像 61 在錄影帶上搜尋相片影像

(Photo Search)

62

播放

62

連接

68

74

在 LCD 螢幕上播放錄影帶 63

播放機模式中的各項功能 65 配音（僅適用於 VP-D382

( i )/D382H/D385( i ))

66

配音後的聲訊播放 (Audio Select) 67 Audio effect

68 設定 AV IN/OUT (AV IN/OUT)

(僅適用於 VP-D381i/D382i/D385i） 69 在電視螢幕上播放的錄影帶 71 將攝錄放影機錄影帶複製到視訊錄影

帶上 72 使用 73 將電視節目或錄影帶錄製（複製）到

攝錄放影機錄影帶

（僅適用於 VP-D381i/D382i/D385i）

74 使用記憶卡（可用記憶卡）

（未提供） 75 記憶卡中的資料夾與檔案結構 77 設定檔案編號 ( 78 拍攝記憶卡上的相片影像 ( 79 檢視相片影像 (

保護以防止意外刪除 (Protect)

80 81 刪除相片影像和動態影像 (Delete)

C.Nite)

Light)（僅適用於

( i )

/D382H/D384/D385

VOICE+ 功能

File No.)

JPEG)

BLC)

Digital

( i ))

JPEG)

臺灣 _05

05_ English

PICTBRIDGE™

(VP-D385( i ) ONLY)

IEEE 1394 DATA

TRANSFER

USB INTERFACE

(VP-D385( i ) ONLY)

94

83

Formatting a memory card (Format)

84 Recording moving images (MPEG)

on a memory card Playing the moving images (MPEG)

86

on a memory card (M.Play select)

87 Recording an image from a tape as a

photo image

88 Copying a photo image from a tape to

a memory card

89

Marking images for printing (Print Mark)

90 Printing your pictures - using the

pictbridge

92 Transferring ieee1394 (I.Link) -

DV standard data connections

94 Using USB Interface 96 Selecting the

(USB Connect)

97 Installing the software

(DV Media Pro programme)

98 Connecting to a

(Photo Copy)

TM

USB device

PC

PICTBRIDGE™

(僅適用於

VP-D385( i ))

IEEE1394資料傳輸

USB 介面（僅適用於

VP-D385( i ))

94

83 格式化記憶卡 (Format) 84 錄製記憶卡上的影片影像 (MPEG) 86 播放記憶卡上的動態影像 (

（M.Play 選擇） 87 將錄影帶中的影像錄製成相片影像 88 將錄影帶中的相片影像複製到記憶卡

(Photo Copy) 89 標記要列印的影像 (

90 列印相片 – 使用 pictbridge

92 傳輸 ieee1394 (I.Link)-DV 標準資料

連接

94 使用 USB 介面

USB 裝置 (USB Connect)

96 選擇 97 安裝軟體（ 98 連接至電腦

DV Media Pro 程式）

MPEG)

Print Mark)

TM

MAINTENANCE

100

TROUBLESHOOTING

SPECIFICATIONS

100 After nishing a recording

100 Usable cassette tapes 101 Cleaning and maintaining the cam

corder Using your miniDV camcorder abroad

102

103 Troubleshooting 105 Setting menu items

107

100 完成錄製後

維護

-

100

故障排除

100 可用錄影帶 101 清潔和維護攝錄放影機 102 在國外使用

103 故障排除 105 設定選單項目

107

規格

miniDV 攝錄放影機

06_ English

臺灣 _06

getting to know your miniDV camcorder

WHAT IS INCLUDED WITH YOUR MINIDV CAMCORDER

Your new Digital Video camcorder comes with the following accessories. If any of these items is missing from your box, call Samsung’s Customer Care Centre.

✪

The exact appearance of each item may vary by model.

Battery pack (IA-BP80W )

1

AC power adapter

2

(AA-E9 type) Audio/Video Cable

3

USB cable (VP-D385( i ) only)

4

Software CD (VP-D385( i ) only)

5

User manual

6

Button-type Battery for Remote

7

Control (Type: CR2025) (VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ) only) Remote Control

8

(VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ) only) Lens cover

9

Lens Cover Strap

10

Tape* (Option)

11

Carrying Case* (Option)

12

The contents may vary depending on the sales region.

•

Parts and accessories are available at your local Samsung

•

dealer. *(Option) : This is an optional accessory. To buy this one,

•

contact your nearest Samsung dealer. A memory card is not included. See page 74 for memory

•

cards compatible with your miniDV camcorder.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

10 11 12

了解您的

MINIDV

您的

您的新數位視訊攝錄放影機隨附了以下配件。如果包裝盒中遺失了任何這些項目、請聯絡 Samsung 客戶服務中心。

✪



每個項目的實際外形都可能因機型而異。



內地視銷售地區的不同而有所不同。

•

部件與配件可從您當地的

•

*（可選）：此為可選購的配件。要購買、請與您就近的

•

Samsung 經銷商聯絡。不隨附記憶卡。請參閱第 74 頁以了解記憶卡與

•

放影機相容的資訊。

miniDV

攝錄放影機的隨附物件

攝錄放影機



電池組 (

1

交流電源適配器

2

( 型號 :

AA-E9

聲訊 / 視訊纜線

3

纜線（僅適用於

USB

4

軟體 CD

5

（僅適用於

使用者手冊

6

遙控器的鈕扣電池 ( 型號 :CR2025)

7

（僅適用於

( i ))

遙控器（僅適用於

8

/D382H/D385( i ))

鏡頭護蓋

9

透鏡蓋帶子

10

錄影帶 *( 可選 )

11

攜帶套 * ( 可選 )

12

Samsung

)

IA-BP80W

)

VP-D385( i ))

VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385

VP-D382( i )

代理商選購。

miniDV

攝錄

臺灣 _07

07_ English

FRONT & LEFT VIEW

OPEN

正視圖和左視圖

5

Lens

1

Remote sensor (VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ) only)

2

Light (VP-D382

3

OPEN switch

4

EASY Q button ➥page 36

5

Display ( ) button

6

TFT LCD screen

7

Internal microphone

8

( i )

/D382H/D384/D385

Be careful not to cover the internal microphone and lens during recording.

CAUTION

1

2

6

7

3

4

鏡頭

1

遙控感應窗（僅適用於

2

( i )

only)

燈（僅適用於

3

開關

OPEN

4

按鈕 ➥第 36 頁

EASY Q

5

顯示 ( ) 按鈕

6

螢幕

TFT LCD

7

內置麥克風

8

在錄製過程中、請小心不要蓋住內部麥克風和鏡頭。

注意

8

(VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ))

VP-D382

( i )

/D382H/D384/D385

( i ))

08_ English

臺灣 _08

getting to know your

A

V

DV

B

A

T

.

M

E

N

U

W

T

M

O

D

E

PO

W

ER

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

miniDV camcorder

LEFT SIDE VIEW

了解您的

左視圖

miniDV

4

攝錄放影機

1 2

3

1

MENU button

2

Joystick ( / /  / / Select), (W/T) switch ➥page 23

3

Recording start/stop button

4

Jack cover (AV/DV jack)

Built-in speaker

5

Select (CARD-TAPE) switch (VP-D385( i ) only)

6

Battery pack

7

Battery release (BATT.) switch

8

When you close LCD panel with the LCD screen facing out, Joystick (// /) function works reversely.

5

6 7 8

(VP-D385( i ) only)

1

按鈕

MENU

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

( / /  / / 選擇 ),

Joystick

錄製開始 / 停止按鈕插孔蓋（

AV/DV

插孔）內置喇叭

選擇 (

CARD-TAPE

) 開關（僅適用於

電池組電池釋放閂 (

使用

LCD

(// /) 功能會倒退操作。

) 開關

BATT.

螢幕淡出功能關閉

(W/T)

LCD

面板時、

➥第 23 頁

VP-D385( i ))

Joystick

臺灣 _09

09_ English

RIGHT & TOP VIEW

M

O

D

E

AV

D

V

PO

W

ER

C

H

G

VOL

Zoom(W/T) / Volume (VOL) lever

1

PHOTO button ➥page 60,78

2

Recording start/stop button

3

4

POWER switch

5

Jack cover (DC IN, USB (VP-D385(

6

Cassette compartment cover

7

Hand strap

1

2

3 4

5

i

) only) jack)

右視圖和頂視圖

縮放 (

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

) / 音量 (

W/T

按鈕 ➥第 60、78 頁

PHOTO

錄製開始 / 停止按鈕

開關

POWER

插孔蓋（

DC IN、USB

錄影帶座護蓋手提帶

) 杆

VOL

（僅適用於

6

7

VP-D385(

) 插孔）

i

)

10_ English 臺灣 _10

getting to know your miniDV camcorder

REAR & BOTTOM VIEW

1

AV jack

2

MODE button

3

Mode indicator (Camera ( ) / Player ( ) mode)

4

DC IN Jack

5

DV (IEEE1394) jack

6

Charging (CHG) indicator

7

USB jack (VP-D385(

i

) only)

8

Memory card slot (VP-D385(

i

) only)

9

Tripod receptacle

後視圖和底視圖

1

AV 插孔

2

MODE 按鈕

3

模式指示器（相機 ( ) / 播放機 ( ) 模式 )

4

DC IN 插孔

5

DV (IEEE1394) 插孔

6

充電 (CHG) 指示器

7

USB 插孔（僅適用於 VP-D385( i ))

8

記憶卡插槽（僅適用於

VP-D385(

i

)

9

三腳架

了解您的 miniDV 攝錄放影機

98

可用記憶卡（2GB 最大）

僅適用於

VP-D385( i

)

MMC/SD

插孔

VP-D385(

i

)

AV DV DC IN USB

VP-D381( i )

/

D382( i )

/D382H/D384

AV DV DC IN

Jacks

VP-D385(

i

)

AV DV DC IN USB

VP-D381( i )

/

D382( i )

/D382H/D384

AV DV DC IN

AV

MODE

DC IN

DV

POWER

CHG

1

4

5

6 7

3

2

Usable Memory Cards (2GB Max)

VP-D385( i ) only

MMC/SD

USING THE REMOTE CONTROL (VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ) ONLY)

PHOTO button ➥page 60,78

1

REC button

2

SELF TIMER button ➥page 39

3

ZERO MEMORY button ➥page 38

4

PHOTO SEARCH button ➥page 61

5

A.DUB button ➥page 65

6

(FF) button

7

(REW) button

8

(PLAY) button

9

(-) / (+) (Direction) button

10

➥

page 64

Display

11

W/T (Zoom) button

12

13

X2

DATE/TIME button

14

15

(SLOW) button

(PAUSE) button

16

(STOP) button

17

F. ADV button ➥page 64

18

button

( )

➥

button

page 64

1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 󱯠

使用遙控器(僅適用於

󱯡

󱯢

󱯣

󱯤

󱯥 󱯦

10

󱯧 󱯨

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ))

按鈕 ➥第 60,78 頁

PHOTO

1

按鈕

REC

2

SELF TIMER

3

ZERO MEMORY

4

PHOTO SEARCH

5

A.DUB

6

7

8

(



9

➥

顯示

W/T

X2

DATE/TIME

（暫停）按鈕

（停止）按鈕

F. ADV

按鈕 ➥第 39 頁

按鈕 ➥第 38 頁

按鈕 ➥第 61 頁

按鈕 ➥第 65 頁

(FF) 按鈕



(

) 按鈕

REW



) 按鈕

PLAY

(-) / (+) （播放）按鈕

第 64 頁

按鈕

( )

（縮放）按鈕

➥

按鈕

第 64 頁

按鈕

（慢動作）按鈕

按鈕 ➥第 64 頁

The buttons on the remote control function the same as those on the miniDV camcorder.

11_ English

遙控器上的按鈕與

攝錄放影機上的按鈕功能相同。

miniDV

臺灣 _11

12_ English

臺灣 _12

preparation

OPEN

手帶

調整手提帶

透鏡蓋

裝上透鏡蓋

4.

5.

6.

This section provides information on using this miniDV camcorder: such as how to use the provided accessories, how to charge the battery, how to set up the operation and screen indicators in each mode.

USING THE HAND STRAP & LENS COVER

It is very important to ensure that the hand strap has been correctly adjusted before you begin your recording. The hand strap enables you to:

Hold the camcorder in a stable, comfortable position.

•

Put your hand in a position where you can easily operate the

•

Recording start/stop button, PHOTO button, and the Zoom lever.

Hand Strap

Adjusting the Hand Strap

1. Insert the hand strap into the hand

strap hook on the front side of the camcorder and pull its end through the hook.

2. Insert your hand into the hand strap and adjust its length for your convenience.

3. Close the hand strap.

Lens Cover

Attaching the Lens Cover

4. Hook up the lens cover with the

lens cover strap as illustrated.

5. Hook up the lens cover strap to the hand strap, and adjust it following the steps as described for the hand strap.

6. Close the hand strap.

Installing the Lens Cover after Operation

Press buttons on both sides of the lens cover, then attach it to the camcorder lens.

1 2 3

4 5 6

準備工作

本節提供關於使用此的配件、如何充電及如何在各個模式下設定操作和螢幕指示器。

使用手提帶和鏡頭護蓋

開始拍攝之前、確定正確調整手提帶是非常重要的。手提帶可以讓您：

將攝錄放影機固定在穩定安全的位置。

•

將手放在能輕鬆操作

•

的位置。

攝錄放影機的資訊：例如：如何使用提供

miniDV

錄製開始 / 停止

按鈕、

PHOTO

按鈕和縮放杆

手帶

調整手提帶

將手提帶穿入攝錄放影機前方的手

1.

提帶扣、並拉至帶扣的末端。

將您的手穿過手提帶、然後調整適

2.

合的長度。

合上手提帶。

3.

透鏡蓋

裝上透鏡蓋

使用透鏡蓋帶子連接透鏡蓋、如圖

4.

所示。

將透鏡蓋帶子連接到手提帶、然後

5.

依照手提帶所述步驟進行調整。

合上手提帶。

6.

完成操作後安裝透鏡蓋

按下透鏡蓋兩邊的按鈕、然後將它蓋在攝錄放影機的鏡頭上。

臺灣 _13

13_ English

INSTALLING THE BUTTON-TYPE BATTERY

遙控器的鈕扣電池安裝 ( 僅適用於

VP-D382

1.

2.

3.

Button-type battery installation for the remote control (VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ) only)

1. Pull out the button-type battery holder

toward the direction of the arrow.

2. Position the button-type battery in the button-type battery holder, with the positive ( ) terminal face up.

3. Reinsert the button-type battery holder.

安裝鈕扣電池

遙控器的鈕扣電池安裝 ( 僅適用於

VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i )

將鈕扣電池座沿著箭頭方向拉出。

1.

將鈕扣電池放入鈕扣電池座、正極 ( )

2.

端向上。

重新插入鈕扣電池座中

3.

)

Precaution regarding the button-type battery

There is a danger of explosion if button-type battery is incorrectly

•

replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. Do not pick up the battery using tweezers or other metal tools. This

•

will cause a short circuit. Do not recharge, disassemble, heat or immerse the battery in water

•

to avoid the risk of explosion.

Keep the button-type Battery out of reach of children. Should a battery be swallowed, seek medical attention

WARNING

immediately.

有關紐扣電池的注意事項

如果沒有正確更換鈕扣電池、將會有爆炸的危險。請使用相同類型

•

的電池來更換。切勿使用鑷子或其他金屬工具取出電池。這樣可能會引起短路。

•

切勿充電、拆解、加熱或將電池浸泡在水中、以防爆炸危險。

•

警告

將鈕扣電池存放在兒童無法接觸的地方。如果吞下電池，請即刻尋求醫療救助。

14_ English

臺灣 _14

preparation

插入/彈出電池組

3.

電池組充電

3.

4.

5.

P O

W E R

B

A T

T

.

P O

W E R

B

A T

T

.

P O W E R

C

B A

T

T .

BATT.

P O

W E R

C

B

A

T

.

USING THE BATTERY PACK

Use the IA-BP80W battery pack only.

•

The battery pack may be charged a little at the time of purchase.

•

Be sure to charge the battery pack before you start using your

•

miniDV camcorder.

Inserting / Ejecting the battery pack

1. Open the LCD screen as shown in the diagram.

2. Insert the battery pack into the battery pack slot until it

softly clicks.

•

3. Slide the BATT. release switch and pull out the battery pack.

•

Charging the Battery Pack

1.

Slide the POWER switch downwards to turn off the power.

2. Insert the battery pack to the camcorder.

3. Open the jack cover and connect the AC power adaptor

to the DC IN jack.

4. Connect the AC power adaptor to a wall socket.

5. Once charged, disconnect the AC power adaptor from the

DC IN jack on your camcorder.

•

Use only Samsung-approved battery packs. Do not use batteries from

other manufacturers. Otherwise, there is a danger of overheating,  re or

explosion. Samsung is not responsible for problems occured due to using unapproved batteries.

Insert

Make sure that word mark (SAMSUNG) is facing out while the camcorder is placed as shown in the diagram.

Gently slide the BATT. release switch in the direction as shown in the diagram.

Additional battery packs are available at your

•

local Samsung dealer. If the miniDV camcorder will not be in use for a

•

while, remove the battery pack from the miniDV camcorder.

Even with the power switched off, the battery pack will still discharge if it is left inserted in the camcorder.

It is recommended that you purchase one or more additional battery packs to allow continuous use of your miniDV camcorder.

Eject

準備工作

使用電池組

僅使用

•

電池組在購買時可能已經有少量電量。

•

在使用

•

建議您購買一個或多個額外的電池組、這樣可連續使用您的

請僅使用

Samsung

否則、將會導致過熱、火災或爆炸的危險。由於使用未經批準的電池而導致的問題、

電池組。

IA-BP80W

攝錄放影機之前一定要為電池組充電。

miniDV

插入/彈出電池組

按如圖所示方式打開

1.

將電池組插入電池組插槽中、直到輕輕卡入到位。

2.

放置攝錄放影機時、確保文字標誌 (

•

外、如圖所示。

3. 滑動 BATT. 釋放開關、並取出電池組。按如圖所示方向輕輕滑動

•

額外的電池組可從您當地的

•

購。若長時間不使用

•

攝錄放影機中取出電池組。

電池組充電

向下滑動

1.

在攝錄放影機中裝上電池組。

2.

打開插孔護蓋、然後將 AC 電源適配器連接到

3.

插孔。

IN

將 AC 電源適配器連接到牆上插座。

4.

在完成充電後、從攝錄放影機的

5.

電源適配器。

AC

如果將電池組留在攝錄放影機內、即使電源開關關閉、

•

電池組仍然會放電。

攝錄放影機。

miniDV

認可的電池組。切勿使用其他廠家的電池。

POWER

開關以關閉電源。

螢幕。

LCD

攝錄放影機、請從

miniDV

Samsung

SAMSUNG

釋放開關。

BATT.

Samsung

DC IN

概不負責。

代理商選

miniDV

DC

插孔斷開

) 面朝

臺灣 _15

15_ English

Charging indicator

充電指示器

LED 的顏色標示電源或充電的狀態。

AV

MODE

DC IN

DV

POWER

CHG

OWER

CHG

The colour of the LED indicates the power or charging state.

If the battery pack has been fully charged, the

•

charge indicator is green. If you are charging the battery, the colour of the

•

charge indicator is orange. If an error occurs while the battery pack in

•

charging, the charging indicator blinks orange.



充電指示器

LED 的顏色標示電源或充電的狀態。

如果電池組完全充滿、充電指示燈會呈綠色。

•

如果您正在給電池充電、則充電指示燈會呈

•

橙色。如果電池包充電時發生錯誤、則充電指示燈

•

會呈橙色閃爍。

Charging, Recording Times with a fully charged battery pack (with no zoom operation, LCD open, etc.)

Measured times shown in the table are based on model VP-D385( i )

•

(Times for VP-D381( i )/D382( i )/D382H/D384/D385( i ) are almost the same.) The time is only for reference. Figures shown in the table are

•

measured under Samsung’s test environment, and may differ from your actual use. The recording time shortens dramatically in a cold

•

environment. instructions are measured using a fully charged battery pack at 25 °C (77 °F). As the environmental temperature and conditions vary, the remaining battery time may differ from the approximate continuous recording times given in the instructions.

Battery

IA-BP80W

The continuous recording times in the operating

Time

Charging time Recording time

Approx.

1hr 20min

Approx.

1hr 20min

完全充電電池組的充電、錄製和播放時間（無縮放操作、

LCD

開啟等）

表中顯示的測得時間基於型號

•

.

（

VP-D381( i )/D382( i )/D382H/D384/D385( i )

VP-D385( i )

同。）時間僅供參考。表中顯示的數字為在

•

量、並可能會因實際使用情況而異。在寒冷的環境溫度下、錄製時間會急速縮短。操作說明中提供

•

的連續錄製時間是根據在

25 °C (77 °F)

電池組所測得的結果。由於環境溫度和條件會經常改變、因此剩餘的電池時間可能會與說明中提供的大約連續錄製時間有所不同。

時間

電池

IA-BP80W

充電時間錄製時間

大約

1 小時 20 分鐘

。

的時間幾乎相

Samsung

溫度下使用完全充電的

大約

1 小時 20 分鐘

測試環境下測

16_ English

臺灣 _16

preparation

The amount of continuous recording time available depends on:

The type and capacity of the battery pack you are using.

•

Ambient temperature.

•

How often the zoom function is used.

•

Type of use (camcorder/camera/With LCD screen etc.)

•

It is recommended that you have several batteries available.

•

To check the remaining battery charge, press and hold the

•

Display ( ) button. ➥page 21 The charging time will vary depending on the remaining

•

battery level.

Battery Level Display

The battery level display indicates the amount of power remaining in the battery pack.

a. Fully charged b. 20~40% used c. 40~80% used d. 80~95% used e. Completely used (Blinking)

(The Camcorder will turn off soon, change the battery as soon as possible.)

Battery Pack Management

The battery pack should be recharged in an environment between 0

•

°C (32 °F) and 40°C (104 °F). The life and capacity of the battery pack will be reduced if it is used

•

in temperatures below 0 °C (32 °F) or left in temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F) for a long period of time, even when it is fully recharged.

Do not put the battery pack near any heat source (i.e.  re or a heater).

•

Do not disassemble, apply pressure to, or heat the battery pack.

•

Do not allow the + and – terminals of the battery pack to be short-

•

circuited. It may cause leakage, heat generation, induce overheating

or  re.

(Blinking)

準備工作

可用的連續錄製時間視以下情況而定：

您使用的電池組類型和容量。

•

周圍環境的溫度。

•

是否經常使用縮放功能。

•

使用類型（攝錄放影機/相機/具備

•

建議您準備數個備用電池。

•

要檢查剩餘的電池電量、可按住

•

➥

第

頁

21

充電時間因剩餘電池電量而異。

•

電池電量顯示

電池容量顯示可指出電池組的剩餘電量。

a. 完全充電 b. 用完 20~40% c. 用完 40~80% d. 用完 80~95% e. 完全用完（閃爍）

（攝錄放影機就快關閉、請儘快更換電池。）

電池組管理

電池組必須在介於

•

新充電。若在溫度低於

•

處於溫度高於會減少、即使它已經完全充電。切勿將電池組放在靠近熱源的地方（如火或曖器）。

•

切勿拆開、擠壓或加熱電池組。

•

切勿讓電池組的

•

漏液、發出熱量、引起過熱或火災。

0 °C (32 °F) 和 40°C (104 °F)

0 °C (32 °F) 40°C (104 °F)

+

的地方使用電池組、或者電池組長時間

的地方、電池組的使用壽命和容量將

正極和

負極端形成短路。這可能導致電池組

–

LCD

顯示

螢幕等）。

按鈕。

( )

的環境溫度下重

臺灣 _17

17_ English

Notes regarding the Battery Pack

M O

D E

AV

D

V

POWE

R

CHG

V O L

POWER

Please refer to the table on page 15 for approximate continuous recording time.

•

The recording time is affected by temperature and environmental conditions.

•

The recording time shortens dramatically in a cold environment, as the

•

environmental temperature and conditions vary. The continuous recording times in the operating instructions are measured

•

using a fully charged battery pack at 25 °C (77 °F). The remaining battery time may differ from the approximate continuous recording times given in the instructions.

When purchasing a new battery pack, we recommend buying the same

•

battery pack that is provided with this camcorder. The battery pack is available at SAMSUNG retailers.

When the battery reaches the end of its life, please contact your local dealer.

•

Batteries should be handled as chemical waste. Make sure that the battery pack is fully charged before starting to record.

•

A brand new battery pack is not charged. Before using the battery pack, you

•

need to charge it completely. The battery pack may be prone to leakage when fully discharged. Fully

•

discharging a battery pack damages the internal cells. To preserve battery power, keep your camcorder turned off when you are not

•

operating it. If your camcorder is in Camera mode, and it is left in STBY mode without

•

being operated for more than 5 minutes with a tape inserted, it will automatically turn itself off to protect against unnecessary battery discharge. Do not drop the Battery Pack. Dropping the battery pack may damage it.

•

CONNECTING A POWER SOURCE

There are two types of power source that can be

•

connected to your camcorder.

-

The AC Power Adapter: used for indoor recording.

- The Battery Pack: used for outdoor recording.

Using a Household Power Source

Connect to a household power source to use the camcorder without having to worry about the battery power. You can keep the battery pack attached; the battery power will not be consumed.

1. Slide the POWER switch downwards to turn off the power.

2. Open the jack cover and connect the AC power adaptor to the DC IN jack.

3. Connect the AC power adaptor to a wall socket.

The plug and wall socket type may differ according to your resident

country.

4. Slide the POWER switch downwards to turn on the power and press the MODE button to set Camera( ) or Player( ).

3

有關電池組的注意事項

•

連接電源

1

2

將 AC 電源適配器連接到牆上插座。

3.

•

向下滑動

4.

請參考第錄製時間會受溫度和環境條件的影嚮。

頁的表、以獲知大約的連續錄製時間。

15

由於環境溫度和條件會經常改變、因此錄製時間在寒冷的環境溫度下會急速縮短。操作說明中提供的連續錄製時間是根據在用完全充電的電池組所測得的結果。剩餘的電池時間可能會與說明

25 °C (77 °F)

溫度下使

中提供的大約連續錄製時間有所不同。

在購買新的電池組時，我們建議您購買與攝錄放影機隨附的電池組相同的電池組。可以到

在電池到達其使用壽命時、請與當地經銷商聯絡。電池應該作為化學廢物處理。開始拍攝之前、請確定電池組已經完全充電。

SAMSUNG

零售商購買電池組。

全新的電池組並未經過充電。使用電池組之前、您必須將它完全充電。完全放電的電池組可能會導致漏液。電池組完全放電時、可能會損壞內部元件。為節省電池電量、在不使用時關閉攝錄放影機電源若攝錄放影機處於留在不必要的電池放電。切勿讓電池組掉落。掉落的電池組可能會損壞。

Camera

（待機）模式不操作超過

STBY

•

（錄製）模式、並在插入錄影帶的情況下、

分鐘、它將自動關閉以避免

5

有兩種電源類型可以連接到攝錄放影機。

-

交流電源適配器：用於室內拍攝。

- 電池組：用於戶外拍攝。

使用家中電源

使用家用電源為攝錄放影機供電、就不必經常擔心電池電量的多寡。您可以讓電池組留在設備中、電池電量將不會消耗掉。

向下滑動

1.

打開插孔護蓋、然後將 AC 電源適配器連接

2.

到

DC IN

牆上插座和插頭類型會因不同的國家而異。

開關以開啟電源、然後按下

POWER

設定

Camera

( ) 或

Player

POWER

插孔。

( ).

開關以關閉電源。

MODE

按鈕以

18_ English

臺灣 _18

hw

l

hwljhyk

{hwljhyk {

hw

l

hwljhyk

{hwljhyk {

hw

l

hwljhyk

tvkl tvkl

{hwljhyk {

hw

l

hwljhyk

hw

l

hwljhyk

hw

l

hwljhyk

{hwljhyk {

hw

l

hwljhyk

tvkl tvkl

hw

l

hwljhyk

preparation

hw

l

hwljhyk

{hwljhyk {

hw

l

hwljhyk

{hwljhyk {

hw{

l

hwljhyk

tvkl tvkl

{hwljhyk {

hw

l

hwljhyk

hw

l

hwljhyk

hw

l

hwljhyk

{hwljhyk {

hw{

l

hwljhyk

tvkl tvkl

hw

l

hwljhyk

開啟和關閉

您可以透過向下滑動

放影機。

設定操作模式

1.

AV

MODE

DC IN

DV

POWER

CHG

BASIC MINIDV CAMCORDER OPERATION

Turning the miniDV camcorder on and off

You can turn the camcorder on or off by sliding the POWER switch downward.

Slide the POWER switch repeatedly to toggle the power

•

on or off.

Setting the operating modes

Set the operation mode by adjusting the MODE

•

button and Select switch (VP-D385( operating any functions.

1. Press the MODE button to set Camera( ) or Player

( ). Each press of the MODE button toggles between the Camera ( ) mode and Player ( ) mode.

2. Set the Select switch to CARD or TAPE. (VP-D385(

i

- Camera mode ( ): To record movie or photo

- Player mode ( ): To play movie or photo images on a tape. ➥page 19

- M.Cam mode ( ): To record movie or photo images on memory

- M.Player mode ( ): To play movie or photo images on memory

The operating modes are determined by the position of the MODE button

•

and Select switch (VP-D385( i ) only).

) only)

images on a tape. ➥page 19

card.

Mode Name MODE button

i

) only) before

➥

page 20

card. ➥page 20

Select switch

(VP-D385( i ) only)

Camera Mode

Mode indicator

POWER switch

準備工作

MINIDV

攝錄放影機的基本操作

開啟和關閉

您可以透過向下滑動放影機。

MODE button

操作模式取決於

•

機型名稱 MODE按鈕

Camera

模式

miniDV

POWER

重複滑動

•

態。

開關以切換電源的開啟和關閉狀

POWER

設定操作模式

MODE

透過調整

•

功能之前選擇開關（僅適用於

按下

1.

( ). 每次按下

mode

將選擇開關設定為

2.

-

Camera

-

Player

-

M.Cam



M.Player

-

MODE

按鈕設定操作模式，並在操作任何

按鈕以設定

MODE

模式和

Player

CARD 或 TAPE

模式 ( ): 若要錄製錄影帶上的影片或

模式 (

模式 ( ):

模式 (

按鈕和選擇開關的位置（僅適用於

攝錄放影機

開關來開啟或關閉攝錄

VP-D385(

Camera

按鈕都會在

( ) 模式之間進行切換。

。（僅適用於

相片影像。 ➥第 19 頁

): 若要播放錄影帶上的影片或相

片影像。 ➥第 19 頁

若要錄製記憶卡上的影片或相片影像。 ➥第 20 頁

):

若要播放記憶卡上的影片或相片影像。

（僅適用於VP-

( ) 或

Camera

➥

選擇開關

)

i

)

Player

( )

VP-D385(

第 20 頁

VP-D385( i ))

D385( i ))

i

))

。

Player Mode

M.Cam Mode

M.Player Mode

M.Cam Mode : Memory Camera Mode

•

M.Player Mode : Memory Player Mode The M.Cam Mode and the M.Player Mode are only available on

•

the models, (VP-D385( i ) only).

Player模式

M.Cam模式

M.Player模式

M.Cam

•

M.Player M.Cam

•

VP-D385( i ))

模式：記憶體相機模式

模式：記憶體播放模式

模式和

模式僅適用於以下機型

M.Player

。

（僅適用於

臺灣 _19

19_ English

S

No Tape !

[11]

00:00 1.JAN.2008

60min

Sound[2]

0:00:46:06

SP

16Bit

STOP

1

67

4

3

2

8

10

9

5

AV In

3

VV

60min

10Sec

0:00:00

C.Nite 1/25

SP

Art

16Bit

No Tape !

STBY

00:00 1.JAN.2008

S

W T

19

1/50

M

1/50

21 3 4 5 6

1718

19

798

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

19

21

20

22

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

3

14

16:9 Wide

26

SCREEN INDICATORS IN CAMERA / PLAYER MODES

1

Battery Level ➥page 16

2

Tele Macro * ➥page 54 Tape photo recording ➥page 60 / Self timer * ➥page 39

3

(VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ) only)

4

Operating Mode

5

Record Speed Mode ➥page 44

6

Zero Memory ➥page 38 (VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ) only)

7

Time counter (movie recording time)

8

Tape Indicator

9

Remaining Tape (measured in minutes)

10

Audio Mode ➥page 44 Light * ➥page 59

11

(VP-D382( i )/

12

BLC (Back Light Compensation)* ➥page 56

13

WindCut Plus * ➥page 45 Fade ➥page 41/ Remote ➥page 25 (VP-D382( i )/

14

D382H/D385( i ) only)

15

USB * ➥page 98 (VP-D385(

16

C.Nite * ➥page 58

17

Real Stereo ➥page 46

18

Zoom Position * ➥page 37

19

Date/Time ➥page 32

20

Manual Focus * ➥page 42

21

Manual Exposure * ➥page 43

22

Shutter Speed * ➥page 43

23

White Balance * ➥page 49

24

Program AE * ➥page 47

25

DIS * ➥page 55 Visual Effects Mode * ➥page 51

26

EASY.Q * ➥page 36 16:9 Wide ➥page 53

Audio Dubbing ➥page 65

1

(VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ) only) Audio effect ➥page 67

2

AV IN * ➥page 68 (VP-D381i/D382i/D385i only)

3

Remote ➥page 25 (VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ) only)

4

DV IN (DV date transfer mode) ➥page 93

5

VOICE+ Indicator ➥page 72

6

Warning Indicator ➥page 103

7

Message Line ➥page 103

8

Volume Control * ➥page 62

9

DEW ➥page 104

10

Dubbed Audio Playback ➥page 66

D382H/

D384/D385( i ) only)

i

) only)

CAMERA / PLAYER

OSD in Camera Mode

OSD in Player Mode

模式下的螢幕指示器

1

電池容量 ➥第 16 頁

2

望遠微距 * ➥第 54 頁錄影帶相片錄製 ➥第 60 頁 / 自拍計時器 * ➥第 39 頁

3

( 僅適用於

4 5 6

7 8

9 10 11

12 13 14

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10

VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i )

操作模式錄製速度模式 ➥第 44 頁

零記憶 ➥第 38 頁 ( 僅適用於

VP- D382( i )/D382H/D385( i )

時間計數器（影片錄製時間）錄影帶指示器剩餘的錄影帶（以分鐘計算）聲訊模式 ➥第 44 頁

燈 * ➥第 59 頁 ( 僅適用於 VP-

BLC

消除風聲* ➥第 45 頁淡化 ➥第 41 頁 / 遙控器 ➥ 第 25 頁 ( 僅適用於

VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i )) USB

彩色夜景 * ➥第 58 頁逼真立體聲 ➥第 46 頁縮放位置 * ➥第 37 頁日期 / 時間 ➥第 32 頁手動對焦 * ➥第 42 頁手動曝光* ➥第 43 頁快門速度 * ➥第 43 頁白平衡 * ➥第 49 頁程式自動曝光 * ➥第 47 頁

DIS

視訊效果模式 * ➥第 51 頁簡易拍攝 * ➥第 36 頁 16:9 寬螢幕 ➥第 53 頁

配音 ➥第 65 頁 ( 僅適用於

Audio effect AV IN *

遙控器

DV IN（DV

VOICE+

警告指示器➥第 103 頁訊息行 ➥第 103 頁音量控制露水 ➥第 104 頁配音播放 ➥第 66 頁

D382( i )/

（背光補償） * ➥第 56 頁

D382H/D384/D385( i )

* ➥第 98 頁 ( 僅適用於

* ➥第 55 頁

➥

第 67 頁

➥

第 68 頁 ( 僅適用於

➥ 第 25頁 ( 僅適用於

資料傳輸模式） ➥第 93 頁

指示符➥第 72 頁

➥

第 62 頁

*

)

VP-D385(

i

)

VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i )

VP-D381i/D382i/D385i)

VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ))

)

20_ English

臺灣 _20

4

10Sec

No Tape !

Art

10314

60min

00:00 1.JAN.2008

W T

19

21 3

No Memory Card !

4

00:00 1.JAN.2008

[10]

0:00:00

STOP

SMOV0001

2

1

3

4

No Memory Card !

00:00 1.JAN.2008

800X600

2/30

Slide

002

100-0001

7

8

5 6

9

No Memory Card !

preparation

SCREEN INDICATORS IN M.CAM / M.PLAYER MODES (VP-D385( i ) ONLY)

1

Image Recording and Loading Indicator Image Counter

2

(Total number of recordable photo images)

3

CARD (Memory Card) Indicator Light ➥page 59 (VP-D382( i )/

4

D385( i ) only)

1

Time counter (movie recording time)

2

File number of the moving image

3

Volume Control * ➥page 86

4

Erase Protection Indicator ➥page 80

5

Silde ➥page 79 Image Counter (Current photo image/

6

number of recordable photo images)

7

Photo image size ➥page 75

8

Folder Number - File Number

9

Print Mark ➥page 89

OSD indicators shown here are based

•

on model VP-D385( i ). The above screen is an example;

•

it is different from the actual display. The OSD indicators are based

•

on memory capacity of 2GB (VP-D385( i ) only). For enhanced performance, the display indications and the order are subject to change without prior notice. Functions marked with * will not be retained when the miniDV camcorder is powered on after turning it off.

•

D382H/

D384/

Total

➥

page 77

準備工作

M.CAM / M.PLAYER VP-D385( i ))

OSD in M.Cam Mode

OSD in M.Player Mode

模式下的螢幕指示器（僅適用於

1

影像錄製和載入指示器

2

影像計數器（可錄製的相片影像的總數）

3

卡（記憶卡）指示器燈 ➥第 59 頁 ( 僅適用於

4

VP-

D382( i )/

D382H/

D384/D385( i )

1

時間計數器（影片錄製時間）

2

動態影像的檔案編號

3

音量控制 * ➥第 86

4

刪除保護指示器 ➥第 80

5

滑動 ➥第 79 影像計數器（目前相片影像 / 可錄製相片

6

影像的總數）

7

相片影像大小 ➥第 75

8

資料夾編號 – 檔案編號

9

列印標籤 ➥第 89

此處顯示的

•

VP-D385( i )

以上螢幕是用作說明的示例 ﹔ 與實

•

際顯示有所差異。

OSD

•

（僅適用於

使性能更好、顯示器指示和順序會隨

•

時更改、而不先行通知。沒有標上 * 的功能將不會在關閉

•

miniDV

留。

頁

➥

第 77

頁

指示器基於型號

OSD

。

指示器基於

VP-D385( i )

2GB

記憶體容量

)。

攝錄放影機後重新啟動時保

)

頁

臺灣 _21

21_ English

USING THE DISPLAY ( ) BUTTON

A

V

DV

B A

T T.

M

E

N

U

W

T

M

O

D

E

PO

W

E

R

C

H

G

Battery Info

Battery chargedBattery charged

0% 50% 100%

You can switch between the on-screen information display modes: Press the Display ( ) button.

使用顯示( )按鈕

您可以在螢幕上資訊顯示模式之間切換：按下

顯示

( )

按鈕。

Switching the information display mode

You can switch between the on-screen information display modes: Press the Display ( ) button. The full and minimum display modes will alternate.

Full display mode: All information will appear.

•

Minimum display mode: Only operating status

•

indicators will appear.

Checking the remaining battery

Press and hold the

•

while charging with the power off. After a while, the charging status will be displayed on the LCD screen for 7 seconds. The battery charge status is given as

•

reference and is an estimation. It may differ depending on the battery capacity and temperature.

Display ( )

button

切換資訊顯示模式

您可以在螢幕上資訊顯示模式之間切換：按下將交替顯示完全顯示模式和最小顯示模式。

完全顯示模式：將顯示所有資訊。

•

最小顯示模式：僅顯示作業狀態指示符。

•

檢查剩餘電量

在關閉電源的情況下充電時、按住

•

( )

幕上顯示約 7 秒鐘。電池充電狀態僅供參考、是一種估計結果。

•

視電池電量和溫度的不同、它可能會有所不同。

按鈕。

( )

顯示

按鈕。稍後、充電狀態將會在 LCD 螢

22_ English

臺灣 _22

preparation

用於播放、暫停、快進和回轉。還可用作方向按鈕（向

上、向下、向左和向右）和用於在選擇影片、相片影

像或選單時進行選擇。

A

V

D

V

B A TT

.

M

E

N

U

W

T

M

O

D

E

P

O

W

E

R

C

H

G

使用

透過使用

便地存取經常使用的選單。

✪

16Bit

10Sec

S

60min

0:00:00

SP

STBY

3.

16Bit

10Sec

S

60min

0:00:05

SP

STBY

Auto Exposure

16Bit

10Sec

S

60min

0:00:10

SP

STBY

Manual Exposure

19

USING THE JOYSTICK

Used for playback, pausing, fast forwarding, and rewinding. Also used as directional buttons (up, down, left, right) and to make a selection when selecting movie, photo images or menus.

1. Move the Joystick

2. Move the Joystick (

Con rm your selection by pressing Joystick.

•

For more information on the OSD menus displayed using the Joystick (// /),

see page 23.

up or down.

(▲ / ▼)

/ ) left or right.



準備工作

JOYSTICK

使用

用於播放、暫停、快進和回轉。還可用作方向按鈕（向上、向下、向左和向右）和用於在選擇影片、相片影像或選單時進行選擇。

向上或向下移動

1.

向左或向右移動

2.

Joystick

透過按下

•

如需有關使用的

OSD

Joystick

確認選擇。

Joystick

選單的更多資訊、請參閱第 23 頁。

▼

。

(▲ /



)

。





(

)

/

( / / / ) 顯示

HANDLING QUICK MENUS WITH THE JOYSTICK

Using the Joystick, you can easily access to frequently used menus without using the MENU button.

✪

Follow the instruction below to use each of the menu items listed after this page. For example: setting the Exposure in Camera ( )

1. Press the Joystick.

Quick menu is displayed.

2. Press the Joystick

Moving the Joystick up toggles between

3. Press the Joystick to con rm your selection.

Press the Joystick button to exit the quick

mode.

setting.

(

// /

)

to control the

"Auto Exposure" and "Manual Exposure".

menu according to the selected mode.

There are some functions you cannot

•

activate simultaneously when using Joystick. You cannot select the menu items greyed out on the screen. Accessible items in menu and quick menu

•

vary depending on the operation mode.

JOYSTICK

使用

透過使用

Joystick

便地存取經常使用的選單。

✪

請按照以下指示使用在此頁面之後所列出的各





選單項目。例如：設定

按下

Joystick.

1.

會顯示快速選單。

•

按下

Joystick

2.

向上移動

•

和

按下

Joystick

3.

在使用

•

動。您無法選擇在螢幕上呈灰色顯示的選

操作快速選單

、您無需使用

( ) 模式中的曝光

Camera

( / / / )

可在

Joystick

"Manual Exposure"

以確認選擇。

時、有些功能無法同時啟

Joystick

按鈕便可方

MENU

以控制設定。

"Auto Exposure"

之間進行切換。

單項目。選單中可存取的項目和快速選單可能因操

•

作模式而有所不同。

臺灣 _23

23_ English

HANDLING QUICK MENUS WITH THE JOYSTICK Quick Menu In Camera /Player modes

Input

Joystick

Status

Camera

( ) Mode

Player ( )

Mode

-

STOP - - REW FF PLAY

PLAY - STOP REW FF PAUSE

PAUSE - STOP REW FF PLAY

FF - STOP REW FF PLAY

REW - STOP REW FF PLAY

▲

Exposure

Focus Shutter Fade

 

▼

OK

Return /

Selection

/ Exit the

menu

Quick Menu In M.Cam / M.Player modes (VP-D385(i) only)

Input

Joystick

Status

M.Cam

( ) Mode

M.Player

( ) Mode

(Movie

images)

-

STOP -

PLAY - STOP REW FF PAUSE

PAUSE - STOP REW FF PLAY

FF - STOP REW FF PLAY

REW - STOP REW FF PLAY

▲

Exposure

 

▼

Focus - -

Skip

OK

Return / Selection / Exit the

menu

PLAY

JOYSTICK

使用

操作快速選單

Camera/Player模式下的快速選單

輸入

Joystick

Camera

( )

模式

Player (

模式

狀態



- 曝光對焦快門淡化

停止

播放

暫停

)

快進

回轉

▲

- - 回轉快進播放

- 停止回轉快進暫停

- 停止回轉快進播放

M.Cam/M.Player模式下的快速選單

（僅適用於

Joystick

M.Cam

M.Player

( 影片影像)

( )

模式

(

模式

D385( i ))

輸入

狀態



- 曝光對焦 - -

停止

播放

)

暫停

快進

回轉

▲

-

縮略圖

- 停止回轉快進暫停

- 停止回轉快進播放

▼

跳過上一個跳過下一

 

確定

返回 / 選擇 / 結束

選單

確定

返回 / 選擇 / 結束

選單

播放

個

M. Player

( )

Mode

(Photo

images)

- Delete

Thumbnail

Slide Show

M.Player

(

)

模式

(相片影像)



- 刪除



跳過上一個跳過下一個連續放

縮略圖

映

24_ English

臺灣 _24

initial setting :

2.

3.

BA

TT .

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

5.

6.

A

V

D

V

B A TT

.

M

E

N

U

W

T

M

O

D

E

P

O

W

E

R

C

H

G

7.

8.

9.

Adjust Select Exit

Remote Beep Sound Shutter Sound Language

Demonstration

Camera Mode

MENU

System

Clock Set

1 JAN

00 : 00

2008

Move Select Exi t

Remote Beep Sound Shutter Sound Language

Demonstration

Camera Mode

MENU

System

Clock Set

1 JAN

00

Complete !

: 00

2008

system menu setting

SETTING THE CLOCK (CLOCK SET)

Clock setup works in Camera / Player / M.Cam /

•

M.Player modes. ➥page 18 Set the date and time when using this camcorder

•

for the  rst time.

1. Set the Select switch to CARD or TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only)

2. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ) or Player ( ).

3. Press the MENU button.

The menu list will appear.

•

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "System", then press the Joystick or move the Joystick () to the right.

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Clock Set", then press the Joystick.

The year will be highlighted  rst.

•

6. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to set the current year, then press the Joystick.

The month will be highlighted.

•

7.

You can set the month, day, hour and minute following the same procedure after setting the year.

8. Press the Joystick after setting the minutes.

A message "Complete !" is displayed.

•

9. To exit, press the MENU button.

•

Display illustrations in this manual

- OSD illustrations of VP-D385 manual.

- Some of the OSD items shown in this manual may differ slightly from the actual items on your camcorder.

You can set the year up to 2037. Turning the date and time display on/off To switch the date and time display on or off, access the menu and change the date/ time display mode. ➥page 32

( i )

are used in this

(VP-D385( i ) only)

起始設定：系統選單設定

設定時鐘(

CLOCK SET

時鐘設定功能可在

•

M.Player

在首次使用此攝錄放影機時設定日期和時間。

•

將選擇開關設定為

1.

按下

2.

按下

3.

向上或向下移動

4.

向上或向下移動

5.

向上或向下移動

6.

您可以依照設定年份的相同程序來設定月、日、

7.

設定分鐘後、請按下

8.

要結束、可按下

9.

)

Camera / Player / M.Cam /

模式下操作。 ➥第 18 頁

或

CARD

VP-D385( i ))

( ).

•

"System" Joystick

Set"

•

份、然後按下

•

按鈕。

MENU

將顯示選單清單。

、然後按下

首先將反白顯示年份。

將會反白顯示月份。

Joystick

、然後按下

.

()

Joystick

按鈕以設定

MODE

小時和分鐘。

訊息 "

Complete!

•

MENU

您最多可以將年份設定為

開啟 / 關閉日期和時間

- 要開啟或關閉日期和時間顯示器、可存取選單和變更日期 / 時間模式。➥第 32 頁

Camera

(▲ /

Joystick

(▲ /

。

(▲ /

。

Joystick

" 會顯示。

按鈕。

TAPE

( ) 或

▼

)

或向右移動

▼

)

▼

)

。

2037

。（僅適用於

以選擇

以設定目前年

在本手冊中顯示圖例

本手冊採用

-

- 本手冊中的部份

VP-D385( i )

際項目略有不同。

的

圖例。

OSD

項目可能與攝錄放影機的實

OSD

Player

"Clock

。

臺灣 _25

25_ English

SETTING THE WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL ACCEPTANCE

Move Select Exi t

Remote Beep Sound Shutter Sound Language

Demonstration

Camera Mode

MENU

System

Clock Set

� On � On � On � English

�

On

Move Select Exi t

Remote Beep Sound Shutter Sound Language

Demonstration

Camera Mode

MENU

System

Clock Set

Off

✔ On

BA

TT .

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

A

V

D

V

B A

TT .

M

E

N

U

W

T

M

O

D

E

P

O

W

E

R

C

H

G

(REMOTE) (VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ) ONLY)

The remote function works in Camera / Player /

•

M.Cam / M.Player modes. ➥page 18 The remote function allows you to enable or disable

•

the remote control for use with the camcorder.

1. Set the Select switch to CARD or TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only)

2. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ) or Player ( ).

3. Press the MENU button.

The menu list will appear.

•

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "System", then press the Joystick or move the Joystick () to the right.

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Remote", then press the Joystick.

6. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "On" or "Off", then press the Joystick.

7. To exit, press the MENU button.

If you set the "Remote" to "Off" in the menu and try to use it, the remote control indicator ( ) will blink for 3 seconds on the LCD screen and then disappear.

(VP-D385( i ) only)

設定無線遙控器接收(

REMOTE

VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ))

時鐘設定功能可在

•

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

模式下操作。 ➥第 18 頁

M.Player

遙控功能可以讓您啟用或停用攝錄放影機的遙控器。

將選擇開關設定為

（僅適用於

按下

Player

按下

•

VP-D385( i ))

按鈕以設定

MODE

( ).

按鈕。

MENU

將顯示選單清單。

向上或向下移動

、然後按下

"System"

()

.

Joystick

向上或向下移動

、然後按下

"Remote"

向上或向下移動

或

、然後按下

"Off"

要結束、可按下

若您在選單中將嘗試使用它、 ( ) 將會閃爍 3 秒後消失。

)（僅適用於

Camera / Player / M.Cam /

或

TAPE

Camera

( ▲/▼ )

。

( ) 或

以選擇

或向右移動

以選擇

。

以選擇

設定為

"Off"

CARD

Joystick

按鈕。

MENU

"Remote"

螢幕上的遙控器指示燈

LCD

"On"

、並

26_ English

臺灣 _26

initial setting :

Move Select Exi t

Remote Beep Sound Shutter Sound Language

Demonstration

Camera Mode

MENU

System

Clock Set

Off

✔ On

1.

BA

TT .

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

3.

4.

5.

A

V

D

V

B

A TT .

M

E

N

U

W

T

M

O

D

E

P

O

W

E

R

C

H

G

6.

7.

Move Select Exi t

Remote Beep Sound Shutter Sound Language

Demonstration

Camera Mode

MENU

System

Clock Set

� On � On � On � English

�

On

system menu setting

SETTING THE BEEP SOUND (BEEP SOUND)

The beep sound function works in Camera /

•

Player / M.Cam / M.Player modes. ➥page 18 You can turn the beep sound on or off, when on,

•

each press of a button sounds a beep.

(VP-D385( i ) only)

起始設定：系統選單設定

設定嗶聲(

BEEP SOUND

時鐘設定功能可在

•

M.Player

您可以將嗶聲開啟或關閉、開啟時每按一個按鈕就

•

會發出一次嗶聲。

)

Camera / Player / M.Cam /

模式下操作。 ➥第 18 頁

1. Set the Select switch to CARD or TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only)

2. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ) or Player ( ).

3. Press the MENU button.

The menu list will appear.

•

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "System", then press the Joystick or move the Joystick () to the right.

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Beep Sound", then press the Joystick.

6. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "On" or "Off", then press the Joystick.

7. To exit, press the MENU button.

When beep sound is set to off, the power on/off sound is off.

將選擇開關設定為

1.

（僅適用於

按下

2.

Player

按下

3.

•

向上或向下移動

4.

"System" Joystick

向上或向下移動

5.

"Beep Sound"

向上或向下移動

6.

或

要結束、可按下

7.

VP-D385( i ))

MODE

( ).

按鈕。

MENU

將顯示選單清單。

、然後按下

()

、然後按下

"Off"

按鈕以設定

CARD

Joystick

、然後按下

Joystick

按鈕。

MENU

或

TAPE

Camera

( ▲/▼ )

( ▲/▼ )

Joystick

( ▲/▼ )

。

( ) 或

以選擇

或向右移動

以選擇

。

以選擇

"On"

如果關閉了嗶聲、則會關閉電源開 / 關聲音。

臺灣 _27

27_ English

SETTING THE SHUTTER SOUND (SHUTTER SOUND)

Move Select Exi t

Remote Beep Sound Shutter Sound Language

Demonstration

Camera Mode

MENU

System

Clock Set

Off

✔

On

BA

TT .

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

A

V

D

V

B A

TT .

M

E

N

U

W

T

M

O

D

E

P

O

W

E

R

C

H

G

Move Select Exi t

Remote Beep Sound Shutter Sound Language

Demonstration

Camera Mode

MENU

System

Clock Set

� On � On � On � English

�

On

The shutter sound function works in Camera /

•

Player / M.Cam modes. ➥page 18 You can turn the shutter sound on or off, when on,

•

with each press of the PHOTO button, the shutter will sound.

1. If you press the MODE button to set it to Camera ( ), set the Select switch to either CARD or TAPE. If you press the MODE button to set it to Player ( ), set the Select switch to TAPE.

2. Press the MENU button.

The menu list will appear.

•

3. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "System", then press the Joystick or move the Joystick () to the right.

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Shutter Sound", then press the Joystick.

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "On" or "Off", then press the Joystick.

6. To exit, press the MENU button.

(VP-D385( i ) only)

設定快門聲音(

•

SHUTTER SOUND)

快門聲音功能可在下操作。 ➥第 18 頁您可以開啟或關閉

PHOTO

如果您按下

1.

( ), 可將如果您按下 ( ), 可將

按下

MENU

2.

將顯示選單清單。

•

向上或向下移動

3.

"System" Joystick

向上或向下移動

4.

"Shutter Sound"

向上或向下移動

5.

或

"Off"

要結束、可按下

6.

Camera / Player / M.Cam

shutter sound

按鈕、快門都將會發出嗶聲。

按鈕以將其設定為

MODE

開關設定為

Select

MODE

Select

按鈕。

Joystick

、然後按下

。

()

Joystick

、然後按下

Joystick

、然後按下

MENU

、開啟時每按一下

Joystick

( ▲/▼ )

Joystick

CARD

TAPE

( ▲/▼

或向右移動

Joystick

。

) 以選擇

按鈕以將其設定為開關設定為

按鈕。

Camera

或

TAPE

Player

。

以選擇

。

以選擇

模式

。

"On"

28_ English

臺灣 _28

initial setting :

Move Select Exi t

Remote Beep Sound Shutter Sound Language

Demonstration

Camera Mode

MENU

System

Clock Set

✔ English

Français Español Deutsch Italiano Português

2.

BA

TT .

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

4.

A

V

D

V

B A

TT .

M

E

N

U

W

T

M

O

D

E

P

O

W

E

R

C

H

G

Move Select Exi t

Remote Beep Sound Shutter Sound Language

Demonstration

Camera Mode

MENU

System

Clock Set

� On � On � On � English

�

On

system menu setting

SELECTING THE OSD LANGUAGE (LANGUAGE)

The Language function works in Camera / Player

•

/ M.Cam / M.Player modes. ➥page 18 You can select the desired language to display

•

the menu screen and the messages.

1. Set the Select switch to CARD or TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only)

2. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ) or Player ( ).

3. Press the MENU button.

The menu list will appear.

•

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "System", then press the Joystick or move the Joystick () to the right.

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Language", then press the Joystick.

The available language options are listed.

•

English / Français / Español / Deutsch /

•

Italiano / Português / Polski / Nederlands / Magyar / Svenska / / / / Iran / Русский / Українська / / Suomi / Türkçe / Norwegian / Danish / Czech / Slovakia

6. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select the desired OSD language, then press the Joystick.

The OSD language is refreshed in the selected

•

language.

7. To exit, press the MENU button.

Language options may be changed without prior notice.

起始設定：系統選單設定

OSD

選擇

(VP-D385( i ) only)

LANGUAGE

語言(

語言功能可在

•

M.Player

您可以選擇所要的語言來顯示選單畫面和訊息。

•

將選擇開關設定為

1.

（僅適用於

按下

MODE

2.

( ).

按下

MENU

3.

將顯示選單清單。

•

向上或向下移動

4.

"System" Joystick

向上或向下移動

5.

"Language"

可用的語言選項將會列出。

•

English / Français / Español / Deutsch / Italiano /

•

Português / Polski / Nederlands / Magyar / Svenska / / / / Iran /

Українська

Norwegian / Danish / Czech / Slovakia

向上或向下移動

6.

語言、然後按下

OSD

•

要結束、可按下

7.

)

Camera / Player / M.Cam /

模式下操作。➥第 18 頁

或

CARD

Camera

( ▲/▼ )

Joystick

( ▲/▼ )

Joystick

(▲ / ▼)

Joystick

按鈕。

TAPE

或向右移動

Русский

。

VP-D385( i ))

按鈕以設定

按鈕。

Joystick

、然後按下

()

Joystick

、然後按下

/ / Suomi / Türkçe /

Joystick

語言將更新為所選的語言。

MENU

語言選項可能會變更、而不預先通知。

。

( ) 或

Player

以選擇

。

/

以選擇所需的

臺灣 _29

29_ English

VIEWING THE DEMONSTRATION (DEMONSTRATION)

BA

TT .

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

8.

Move Select Exi t

Remote Beep Sound Shutter Sound Language Demonstration

Camera Mode

MENU

System

Clock Set

Off

✔

On

3.

5.

6.

Move Select Exi t

Remote Beep Sound Shutter Sound Language Demonstration

Camera Mode

MENU

System

Clock Set

� On � On � On � English

�

On

SAMSUNG Camcorder is...

Demonstration

34x Optical Zoom

1200x Digital Zoom

Multi-Visual Effect

Demonstration automatically shows you the major

•

functions that are included with your camcorder so that you may use them more easily. The demonstration function may only be used in

•

the Camera mode without a tape inserted in the camcorder. ➥page 18 Before you begin: Make sure that there is no tape

•

inserted in the camcorder. ➥page 34 The demonstration operates repeatedly until

•

the demonstration mode is switched off

1.

Set the Select switch to TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only)

2. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ).

3. Press the MENU button.

The menu list will appear.

•

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "System", then press the Joystick or move the Joystick () to the right.

5.

Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select

"Demonstration", then press the Joystick.

6. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "On", then press the Joystick.

7. Press the MENU button.

The demonstration will begin.

•

8.

To quit the demonstration, press the MENU button.

•

.

The demonstration function is automatically activated when the camcorder is left idle for more than 10 minutes after switching to the Camera mode (if no tape is inserted in the camcorder). If you press other buttons (MENU, Joystick, EASY.Q...) during the demonstration mode, the demonstration stops temporarily and resumes 10 minutes later if you do not operate any other functions. The demonstration mode displays in 4:3 aspect ratio on the LCD screen.

(VP-D385( i ) only)

觀賞示範畫面(

•

DEMONSTRATION

)

示範畫面將自動顯示攝錄放影機中的主要功能、讓您可以更輕鬆地使用這些功能。示範畫面功能僅可以在攝錄放影機中必須沒有插入錄影帶。➥第 18 頁

Camera

模式中使用、並且

開始使用之前：請確定攝錄放影機中沒有插入錄影帶。➥第 34 頁示範畫面會重複操作直到關閉示範畫面模式。

將選擇開關設定為

1.

按下

2.

按下

3.

•

向上或向下移動

4.

"System" Joystick

向上或向下移動

5.

"Demonstration"

向上或向下移動

6.

然後按下

按下

7.

•

若要結束示範畫面、請按下

8.

按鈕以設定

MODE

按鈕。

MENU

將會顯示選單清單。

、然後按下

()

Joystick

按鈕。

MENU

示範畫面將會開始。

切換到

•

插入錄影帶）後、若攝錄放影機處於閒置狀

。（僅適用於

TAPE

Camera

Joystick

( ▲/▼ )

Joystick

( ▲/▼ )

、然後按下

Joystick

( ▲/▼ )

。

模式（攝錄放影機中沒有

Camera

( ).

或向右移動

Joystick

MENU

VP-D385( i ))

以選擇

。

以選擇

按鈕。

態超過 10 分鐘、示範畫面功能將會自動啟動。若您在示範畫面模式下按下其他按鈕

•

（

MENU、Joystick、EASY.Q...

面將暫時停止、並在您沒有操作任何其他功

）、示範畫

能的 10 分鐘後恢復。示範畫面模式會以 4:3 畫面比例顯示在 LCD

•

螢幕上。

"On"

、

30_ English

臺灣 _30

initial setting :

LCD Bright LCD Colour Date/Time TV Display

MENU

Guideline

� Off

� Off � On

Move Select Exi t

Camera Mode

Display

Move Select Exi t

LCD Bright LCD Colour Date/Time TV Display

Camera Mode

MENU

Display

Guideline

✔ Off

Cross Grid Safety Zone

1.

2.

3.

BA

TT .

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

5.

6.

A

V

D

V

B A

TT .

M

E

N

U

W

T

M

O

D

E

P

O

W

E

R

C

H

G

display menu setting

SETTING THE GUIDELINE (GUIDELINE)

Adjusting the LCD screen works in Camera / M.Cam

•

modes. ➥page 18 Guideline displays a certain pattern on the LCD

•

screen so that you can easily set the image composition when recording movie or photo images. The miniDV camcorder provides 3 types of guidelines.

•

1. Set the Select switch to CARD or TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only)

2. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ).

3. Press the MENU button.

The menu list will appear.

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Display", then press the Joystick or move the Joystick () to the right.

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Guideline", then press the

6. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select the

guideline display type, then press the

Settings

Off Disables the function. None

Cross

Grid

Safety

Zone

7. To exit, press the MENU button.

•

Joystick

.

Joystick

Contents

Records the subject placed in

the centre as the most general recording composition.

Records the subject on the horizontal

or vertical composition or with close-up.

Records the subject within safety zone

which prevents from being cut when editing in 4:3 for left and right and 2.35:1 for top and bottom. Set "Safety Zone" when you want to have various subjects in one scene with the proper size.

Positioning the subject at the cross point of the guideline makes a balanced composition. Guideline cannot be recorded on the images being recorded.

On-screen

.

display

(VP-D385( i ) only)

起始設定：顯示選單設定

設定導向圖(

GUIDELINE

•

將選擇開關設定為

1.

（僅適用於按下

2.

按下

3.

•

向上或向下移動

4.

向上或向下移動

5.

向上或向下移動

6.

)

調整

Camera / M.Cam

➥

第 18 頁

導向圖在

LCD

片或相片影像時能夠輕鬆設定影像構圖。

攝錄放影機提供 3 種類型的導向圖。

miniDV

VP-D385( i ))

MODE MENU

將顯示選單清單。

然後按下

Joystick

"Guideline"

類型、然後按下

模式下的

螢幕上顯示某種圖案、以便您在錄製影

或

CARD

TAPE

按鈕以設定相機

按鈕。

Joystick

( ▲/▼ )

或向右移動

Joystick

Joystick Joystick

( ▲/▼ )

Joystick

( ▲/▼ )

。

、然後按下

設定內容

Off

停用功能。無將放在中間的主體作為最常見的

Cross

錄製構圖進行錄製。

錄製水平或垂直構圖上或使用特

Grid

寫的主體。

在以左右比例為 4:3 或上下比例為

2.35:1 進行編輯時防止發生中斷的安

Safety

全內區錄製主體。在您想使用正確的

Zone

尺寸將各種主體放在一個場景中時設

要結束、可按下

7.

在導向圖的交叉點定位的主體形成平衡構圖。

•

導向圖無法被錄製到正在錄製的影像上。

•

定

"Safety Zone"

MENU

。

按鈕。

螢幕操作。

LCD

。

( ).

Camera

以選擇

Joystick

以選擇

。

以選擇導向圖顯示

"Display"

()

畫面顯示

語言

、

臺灣 _31

31_ English

ADJUSTING THE LCD SCREEN

Adjust Select E xit

LCD Bright LCD Colour Date/Time TV Display

Camera Mode

MENU

Display

Guideline

[18]

BA

TT .

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

2.

3.

4.

A

V

D

V

B A

TT .

M

E

N

U

W

T

M

O

D

E

P

O

W

E

R

C

H

G

5.

6.

Adjust Select E xit

LCD Bright LCD Colour Date/Time TV Display

Camera Mode

MENU

Display

Guideline

[18]

(LCD BRIGHT/LCD COLOUR)

Adjusting the LCD screen works in Camera /

•

Player / M.Cam / M.Player modes. ➥page 18 Your camcorder is equipped with a 2.7 inch wide

•

colour Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) screen, which enables you to view what you are recording or playing back directly. Depending on the conditions under which you

•

are using the camcorder (indoors or outdoors for example), you can adjust:

- "LCD Bright"

- "LCD Colour"

1. Set the Select switch to CARD or TAPE.

(VP-D385( i ) only)

2. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ) or Player ( ).

3. Press the MENU button.

The menu list will appear.

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Display", then press the Joystick or move the Joystick () to the right.

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select the item you want to adjust "LCD Bright" or "LCD Colour", then press the Joystick.

6. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to adjust

the value of the selected item

"LCD Bright" or "LCD Colour", then press the Joystick.

You can set values for "LCD Bright" and

"LCD Colour" between "0" to "35"

7. To exit, press the MENU button.

Adjusting the LCD screen does not affect

the brightness and colour of the image to be recorded.

LCD

調整

(VP-D385( i ) only)

.

LCD BRIGHT/LCD COLOUR

螢幕(

調整

Camera / Player / M.Cam / M.Player

•

的

螢幕操作。➥第 18 頁

LCD

您的攝錄放影機具備 2.7 英吋彩色液晶顯示 (

•

螢幕、可以讓您檢視錄製的影像或直接播放。視您使用此攝錄放影機的條件（例如、室內或戶外）

•

而定、請調整：

-

"LCD Bright"

-

"LCD Colour"



將

1.

（僅適用於

按下

2.

按下

3.

向上或向下移動

4.

向上或向下移動

5.

向上或向下移動

6.

要結束、可按下

7.

開關設定為

Select

CARD

VP-D385( i ))

按鈕以設定

MODE

( ).

按鈕。

MENU

將顯示選單清單。

•

Joystick

、然後按下

"Display" Joystick

()

整的項目

"LCD Bright"或"LCD Colour"

按下

Joystick

目

"LCD Bright"或"LCD Colour"

下

Joystick

您可以將

•

為

"0"至"35"

調整

LCD

•

色彩。

Joystick

。

Joystick

。

"LCD Bright"和"LCD Colour"

之間的值。

按鈕。

MENU

螢幕不會影響要錄製的影像的亮度和

或

Camera

( ▲/▼ )

)

。

TAPE

( ) 或

以選擇

或向右移動

以選擇您要調

以調整所選項的值、然後按

模式下

LCD

Player

、然後

設定

)

32_ English

臺灣 _32

initial setting:

Move Select Exi t

LCD Bright LCD Colour Date/Time TV Display

Camera Mode

MENU

Display

Guideline

✔

Off Date Time Date&Time

3.

BA

TT .

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

4.

5.

6.

A

V

D

V

B A

TT .

M

E

N

U

W

T

M

O

D

E

P

O

W

E

R

C

H

G

7.

LCD Bright LCD Colour Date/Time TV Display

MENU

Guideline

� Off

� Off � On

Move Select Exi t

Camera Mode

Display

display menu setting

DISPLAYING THE DATE / TIME (DATE / TIME)

The date/time function works in Camera / Player / M.Cam /

•

M.Player modes. ➥page 18 The date and time are automatically recorded on a special

•

data area of the tape.

1.

Set the Select switch to CARD or TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only)

2.

Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ) or Player ( ).

3. Press the MENU button. The menu list will appear.

•

4.

Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Display", then press the Joystick or move the Joystick () to the right.

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Date/

Time", then press the Joystick.

6. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select the date/

time display type, then press the Joystick.

Date/Time display type: "Off", "Date", "Time", "Date&Time".

•

7. To exit, press the MENU button.

•

- When the built-in rechargeable battery

- If the movie or photo recording was made

•

On charging the built-in rechargeable battery

Your camcorder has a built-in rechargeable battery to retain the date, time, and other settings even when the power is off. The built-in rechargeable battery is always charged while your camcorder is connected to the wall outlet via the AC power adaptor or while the battery pack is attached. The rechargeable battery will be fully discharged in about 3 months if you do not use your camcorder at all. Use your camcorder after charging the built-in rechargeable battery. If the built-in rechargeable battery is not charged, any input data will not be backed up and the date/time appears on the screen as "00:00 1.JAN.2008" (when "Date/Time" display is set to "On"). The date/time will read "00:00 1.JAN.2008" in the following conditions:

becomes weak or dead.

before setting the date/time in the miniDV

camcorder. The same functional button exists on the remote control as well. Press it once to display the date "1.JAN.2008", press it twice to display the time and press it again to display both time and date on the screen.

(VP-D385( i ) only)

起始設定：顯示選單設定

顯示日期/時間(

DATE / TIME

日期 / 時間功能可在

•

M.Player

日期和時間會自動記錄在錄影帶的特殊資料區域。

•

將選擇開關設定為

1.

VP-D385( i ))

按下

2.

Player

按下

MENU

3.

將顯示選單清單。

•

向上或向下移動

4.

"Display" Joystick

向上或向下移動

5.

"Date/Time"

向上或向下移動

6.

/ 時間、然後按下

日期 / 時間顯示類型：

•

要結束、可按下

7.

•

)

Camera / Player / M.Cam /

模式下操作。 ➥第 18 頁

或

CARD

按鈕以設定

MODE

( ).

按鈕。

Joystick

、然後按下

()

Joystick

、然後按下

Joystick

按鈕。

MENU

為內置充電式電池充電

您的攝錄放影機具有內置充電式電池、以在關閉電源時保留日期、時間和其他設定。在透過交流電源適配器將攝錄放影機連接到牆上插座時或安裝電池組時、內置充電式電池總是處於充電狀態。如果您不想使用攝錄放影機、充電式電池將在大約 3 個月內完全放電。在充電內置充電式電池後、使用攝錄放影機。如果內置充電式電池沒有充電、將無法複製任何輸入資料、且會在螢幕上出現如下日期 / 時間：

1.JAN.2008

"（當"Date/Time"

在下列情況下、日期 / 時間將顯示為

。

1.JAN.2008

"

- 當內置充電電池電量低或無電量時。

- 如果在設定日期/ 時間（在之前進行影片或相片錄製。

遙控器上也有相同的功能按鈕。按一次便會顯示日期

"

便會顯示時間和日期。

、按兩次便會顯示時間、再按一次

1.JAN.2008

"

。（僅適用於

TAPE

( ) 或

Camera

(▲ / ▼) 以選擇

或向右移動

以選擇

(▲ / ▼)

。

Joystick

以選擇日期

(▲ / ▼)

。

"Off", "Date", "Time", "Date&Time"

顯示為

"

00:00

攝錄放影機中）

miniDV

。

"On"

"

時）

00:00

臺灣 _33

33_ English

SETTING THE TV DISPLAY (TV DISPLAY)

Move Select Exi t

LCD Bright LCD Colour Date/Time TV Display

Camera Mode

MENU

Display

Guideline

Off

✔

On

2.

3.

A

V

D

V

B

A TT .

M

E

N

U

W

T

M

O

D

E

P

O

W

E

R

C

H

G

BA

TT .

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

5.

6.

LCD Bright LCD Colour Date/Time TV Display

MENU

Guideline

� Off

� Off � On

Move Select Exi t

Camera Mode

Display

The TV Display function works in Camera /

•

Player / M.Cam / M.Player modes. ➥page 18 You can select the output path of the OSD

•

(On Screen Display).

-

"Off": The OSD appears in the LCD screen only.

- "On": The OSD appears in the LCD screen and TV. (Connecting to a TV ➥pages 69~70)

- Use the Display( ) button to turn the OSD on/off on the LCD screen and TV. ➥page 21

1. Set the Select switch to CARD or TAPE.

(VP-D385( i ) only)

2. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ) or

Player ( ).

3. Press the MENU button.

The menu list will appear.

•

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select

"Display", then press the Joystick or move the Joystick () to the right.

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select

"TV Display", then press the Joystick.

6. To activate TV Display function, move the

Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "On" or "Off", then press the Joystick.

7. To exit, press the MENU button.

設定電視顯示(

(VP-D385( i ) only)

TV DISPLAY

電視顯示功能可在

•

M.Player

可以選擇

•

"Off": OSD

-

"On": OSD



（連接至電視 ➥第 69~70 頁 )

)

Camera / Player / M.Cam /

模式下操作。➥第 18 頁

（螢幕顯示）的輸出路徑。

OSD

僅顯示在顯示在

螢幕中。

LCD

螢幕和電視機上。

LCD

- 使用顯示( ) 按鈕來開啟 / 關閉電視機上的

將選擇開關設定為

1.

（僅適用於按下

MODE

2.

( )。

按下

MENU

3.

將顯示選單清單。

•

向上或向下移動

4.

"Display" Joystick

向上或向下移動

5.

Display"

若要啟動電視機顯示功能、請向上或向下移動

6.

Joystick

下

Joystick

要結束、可按下

7.

。 ➥第 21 頁

OSD

CARD

VP-D385( i ))

按鈕以設定

按鈕。

Joystick

、然後按下

()

、然後按下

Joystick

(▲ / ▼) 以選擇

。

按鈕。

MENU

或

TAPE

( ) 或

Camera

(▲/ ▼)

或向右移動

(▲ / ▼)

。

"On"或"Off"

。

以選擇

螢幕和

LCD

Player

"TV

、然後按

34_ English

臺灣 _34

basic recording

OPEN

在某些情況下、可能需要採用不同的錄製技

巧。

3.

4.

INSERTING / EJECTING A CASSETTE

When inserting a tape or closing the cassette

•

compartment, do not apply excessive force, as it may cause a malfunction. Do not use any tape other than DV cassettes.

•

1. Connect a power source and slide the OPEN switch.

The cassette compartment cover opens

•

automatically.

2. Inserting a Cassette: Insert a tape into the cassette compartment with the tape window facing outward and the protection tab toward the top. Ejecting a Cassette: Remove the cassette tape, which is automatically ejected by pulling the cassette out.

3. Press the area marked PUSH on the cassette compartment cover until it clicks into place.

The cassette is loaded automatically.

•

4. Close the cassette compartment cover.

VARIOUS RECORDING TECHNIQUES

In some situations different recording techniques may be required.

1. General recording.

2. Downward recording.

Making a recording with a top view of

•

the LCD screen.

3. Upward recording.

Making a recording viewing the LCD

•

screen from below.

4. Self recording.

Making a recording viewing the LCD

•

screen from the front.

Please rotate the LCD screen carefully as excessive rotation may cause damage to the inside of the hinge that connects the LCD screen to the camcorder.

1 2

3

4

1 2

3 4

基本錄製

插入 / 彈出錄影帶

在放入錄影帶或關閉錄影帶座時、請勿過度用力、以免發生故障。

•

切勿使用 DV 錄影帶以外的其他錄影帶。

•

各種錄製技巧

連接電源、並滑動

1.

會自動打開錄影帶座護蓋。

•

2. 插入錄影帶：

並讓錄影帶窗朝前、保護標籤朝上

插入錄影帶：

將它拉出時自動退出。按下錄影帶座護蓋上標記有

3.

直到卡入到位。

•

關閉錄影帶座護蓋。

4.

在某些情況下、可能需要採用不同的錄製技巧。

一般錄製。

1.

往下錄製。

2.

•

往上錄製。

3.

•

自錄製。

4.

•

將錄影帶插入錄影帶座、

取出錄影帶、錄影帶會在

錄影帶將自動裝入。

從

螢幕向下看進行錄製。

LCD

從下方檢視

從前方檢視

請小心旋轉旋轉可能會導致連接錄放影機的鉸鏈內部損壞。

開關。

OPEN

PUSH

螢幕進行錄製。

LCD

螢幕進行錄製。

LCD

螢幕、因為過度的

LCD

。

的區域

螢幕及攝

臺灣 _35

35_ English

10Sec

16Bit

S

No Tape !

W T

29

1/50

M

60min

0:00:00

SP

16:9 Wide

REC

M

O

D

E

P

O

W

E

R

C H

G

V O

L

MENU

O

P E

N

O P

E N

MAKING YOUR FIRST RECORDING

1. Connect a power source to the

camcorder. ➥page 17 (A battery pack or a AC power adapter)

➥

page 14,17

Insert a cassette. ➥page 34

•

If you want to record on a memory

•

card, insert the memory card. (VP-D385( i ) only) ➥page 74

2. Remove the lens cover.

3. Slide the POWER switch downwards to

turn on the power.

Open the LCD screen.

•

Set the Select switch to CARD or

•

TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only) Press the MODE button to set

•

Camera ( ).

-

Make sure that STBY is displayed.

If the write protection tab of the cassette is open (set to save),

•

STOP and "Protection!" will be displayed. Release the write protection tab to record. Make sure the image you want to record appears on the LCD screen.

•

Make sure the battery level indicates that there is enough

•

remaining power for your expected recording time. You can select a record mode of your choice.

•

➥

page 44

4. To start recording, press the Recording start/stop button.

"REC●" is displayed on the LCD screen.

•

To stop recording, press the Recording start/

stop button again. "STBY" is displayed on the LCD screen.

•

Eject the battery pack when you  nish the recordings to

•

prevent unnecessary battery power consumption. The miniDV camcorder provides two Recording start/stop

•

buttons. One is on the rear side of the camcorder and the other one is on the LCD panel. Select the Recording start/stop button according to the use.

進行您的第一次錄製

將電源連接到攝錄放影機。➥第 17 頁

1.

（電池組或交流電源適配器） ➥第 14,17

•

如果錄影帶的寫入保護標籤打開（設定以保存）、

•

"Protection!"

確保您要錄製的影像出現在

•

確保電池電量表示尚有足夠的剩餘電量可供您的預計錄製時間使用。

•

您可以選擇所要的錄製模式。➥第 44 頁

•

若要開始錄製、請按下

4.

•

將顯示。解除寫入保護標籤以進行錄製。

"REC●"

•

若要停止錄製、請再次按

"STBY"

•

在完成錄製後取出電池組、以避免不必要的電池耗電。

攝錄放影機具有兩個錄製開始 / 停止按鈕。其中一

miniDV

個位於攝錄放影機背面、另一個位於用情況選擇

錄製開始 / 停止

頁放入錄影帶。 ➥第 34 頁

•

如果您想在記憶卡上錄製、可插入記

•

憶卡。（僅適用於

➥

第 72 頁

取下透鏡蓋。

2.

向下滑動

3.

打開

LCD

•

將選擇開關設定為

•

（僅適用於

按下

MODE

•

( ).

- 確保顯示

LCD

錄製開始 / 停止

會出現在

LCD

按鈕。

POWER

螢幕上。

LCD

開關以開啟電源。

螢幕。

VP-D385( i ))

按鈕以設定

STBY

按鈕。

螢幕上。

錄製開始 / 停止

螢幕上。

LCD

VP-D385( i ))

或

CARD

TAPE

Camera

。

及

STOP

按鈕。

面板上。根據使

。

36_ English

臺灣 _36

4.

要取消

再次按下

O

P

E N

1.

3.

BA

TT .

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

10Sec

16Bit

S

No Tape !

W T

29

1/50

M

60min

0:00:00

SP

STBY

basic recording

RECORDING WITH EASE FOR BEGINNERS (EASY Q MODE)

The EASY Q function works only in Camera mode. ➥page 18

•

With the EASY Q function, most of the miniDV camcorder settings

•

are automatically adjusted, which frees you from making detailed adjustments.

1. Set the Select switch to TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only)

2. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ).

3. Press the EASY Q button.

When you press the EASY Q button, most

•

functions turn off and the following functions are set to "Auto" (DIS, Focus, White Balance, Exposure, Program AE, Shutter) The EASY Q and DIS( ) indicators appear on

•

the screen at the same time.

4. Press the Recording start/stop button to start recording.

Recording will begin using the basic automatic

•

settings.

To cancel the EASY Q mode

Press the EASY Q button again.

The EASY Q and DIS( ) indicators disappear

•

from the screen. Almost all the settings will return to the settings

•

that were set prior to activating EASY Q mode. You cannot cancel the EASY.Q mode during

•

recording.

Buttons unavailable during EASY.Q operation

•

The following buttons and control are unavailable because the items are automatically set. The "Release the Easy.Q!" messages may appear if unavailable operations are attempted.

- MENU button Taking a photo image using the PHOTO button while EASY.

•

Q is set releases the DIS function.

(VP-D385( i ) only)

基本錄製

初學者可輕鬆地進行錄製（

功能僅可在

EASY Q

•

透過使用

•

EASY Q

整、可使您無需詳細調整。

將選擇開關設定為

1.

按下

2.

按下

3.

•

按下

4.

•

要取消

再次按下

•

功能、大多數

•

模式下操作。 ➥第 18 頁

Camera

按鈕以設定

MODE

按鈕。

EASY Q

當您按下 EASY Q 按鈕時、大多數功能會關閉且以下功能會設定為 Balance, Exposure, Program AE, Shutter) EASY Q 和 DIS( ) 指示器會同時出現在螢幕上。

錄製開始 / 停止

將使用基本的自動設定開始錄製。

EASY Q

按鈕。

EASY Q

EASY Q 和 DIS( ) 指示器會從螢幕上消失。幾乎所有設定都將返回到激活 EASY Q 模式前所設定的設定。您不能在錄製時取消 EASY.Q 模式。

在進行EASY.Q操作時不可用的按鈕

由於會自動設定項目、因此以下按鈕和控制不可用。如果嘗試不可用的操作、可能會出現

"Release the Easy.Q!"

-

MENU

在設定 EASY.Q 時使用片影像、將會解除 DIS 功能。

EASY Q

攝錄放影機設定會自動調

miniDV

。（僅適用於

TAPE

Camera

"Auto"

按鈕以開始錄製。

模式

按鈕

PHOTO

模式）

VP-D385( i ))

( ).

(DIS, Focus, White

訊息。

按鈕拍攝相

臺灣 _3737_ English

ZOOMING IN AND OUT

M O

D E

P O

W

E R

C

H G

VO

L

M

E N U

The zoom function works in both Camera and M.Cam modes.

•

➥

page 18

Use the zoom function for close-up or wide-angle recording.

•

This miniDV camcorder allows you to record using

•

optical 34x power zoom and 1200x digital zoom.

To zoom in

Slide the Zoom lever towards T (telephoto). (Or move down the Joystick ( T ) on the LCD panel.)

To zoom out

Slide the Zoom lever towards W (wide-angle). (Or move up the Joystick ( W ) on the LCD panel.)

The farther you slide the Zoom lever, the quicker the

•

zoom action.

Be sure to keep your nger on the Zoom lever. If you

•

move your nger off the Zoom lever, the operation sound

of the Zoom lever may be also recorded.

Focussing may become unstable during zooming. In this

•

case, set the zoom before recording and lock the focus by using the manual focus, then zoom in or out during recording. ➥page 42 The minimum possible distance between camcorder and

•

subject while maintaining sharp focus is about 1 cm (about

0.39 inch) for wide angle and 50 cm (about 19.68 inch) for telephoto. Optical zoom preserves the movie quality, but during

•

digital zoom the quality of image may suffer. When you zoom into a subject close to the lens,

•

the miniDV camcorder may automatically zoom out depending on the distance to the subject. In this case, set "Macro" to "On." ➥page 54

放大和縮小

縮放功能可在

•

使用縮放功能進行特寫和廣角錄製。

•

本 miniDV 攝錄放影機允許您使用光學 34 倍縮放和 1200 倍數位縮放

•

來進行錄製。

要放大

將縮放杆滑向 T（望遠）。

（或向下移動 LCD 面板上的

要縮小

將縮放杆滑向 W（廣角）

（或向上滑動 LCD 面板上的

縮放桿滑動得越遠、縮放動作就越快。

•

務必將手指放在縮放桿上。如果松開縮放杆、則可能會把縮放

•

杆的操作聲也錄進去。在進行縮放時、對焦可能會不穩定。在此情況下、可在錄製和

•

鎖定焦距之前使用手動對焦功能設定縮放程度、然後在錄製時放大或縮小。➥ 第 42 頁在保持清晰對焦時、攝錄放影機和目標間的最小可行距離大約

•

為 1 公分（大約 0.39 英吋）廣角和 50 公分（大約 19.68 英吋）望遠。光學縮放可以保持影像品質、但是在數位縮放時影像品質可能

•

會受影響。當您放大靠近鏡頭的主體時、miniDV 攝錄放影機會視其與主

•

體之間的距離自動縮小。在此情況下、可將

。➥ 第 54 頁

"On"

TELE

Camera

和

M.Cam

模式下操作。

Joystick ( T )

Joystick ( W )

➥

第 18 頁

。）

" Macro"

設定為

WIDE

W T

38_ English

臺灣 _38

2.

3.

BA

TT .

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

5.

16BIt

S

10Sec

C.Nite 1/30

60min

0:00:30

SP

STBY

16:9 Wide

basic recording

SEARCHING QUICKLY FOR A DESIRED SCENE (SETTING THE ZERO MEMORY)

The zero memory function works in both Camera

•

and Player modes. ➥page 18 You can mark a point on a tape that you want to

•

return to following playback.

1. Set the Select switch to TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only)

2. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ) or Player ( ).

3. Press the ZERO MEMORY button on the remote

control before the recording or during playback at the point where you wish to return.

The time code is changed to a tape counter that

•

is set to zero memory with the zero memory ( 0:00:00 ) indicator displayed. If you want to cancel the zero memory function,

•

press the ZERO MEMORY button again.

4. Finding the zero position.

When you have  nished playback, fast forward

•

or rewind the tape in stop mode.The tape stops automatically when it reaches the zero position.

When you have  nished recording, press

•

the MODE button to set Player ( ) and press the (REW) button. The tape stops automatically when it reaches the zero position.

5. The tape counter with the zero memory ( ) indicator disappears from the display and the tape counter is changed to the time code.

In the following situations, zero memory mode may be cancelled

•

automatically:

-

At the end of the section marked with the zero memory function.

- When the tape is ejected.

- When you remove the battery pack or power supply. The zero memory may not function correctly where there is a

•

break between recordings on the tape. The zero memory function is available only using the remote control.

•

(VP-D382( i )/

D382H/

D385( i ) ONLY)

(VP-D385( i ) only)

基本錄製

快速搜尋所要的場景（設定

（僅適用於VP-D382(i)/D382H/D385(i))

零記憶功能可在

•

➥

您可以在錄影帶上標記您要返回繼續播放的點。

•

將選擇開關設定為

1.

按下

2.

( ).

在錄製前或播放期間、在您要返回的點按遙控器上

3.

的

ZERO MEMORY

•

尋找零位置。

4.

•

具有

5.

從顯示畫面上消失、同時錄影帶計數器也會變更至時間代碼。

ZERO MEMORY

和

第 18 頁

MODE

Camera

按鈕以設定

在顯示 zero memory ( 0:00:00 ) 指示器時、時間代碼變成設定為 zero memory。若您要取消零記憶功能、請再次按下

按鈕。

MEMORY

當您完成播放時、在停止模式中快進或回轉錄影帶。錄影帶將在到達零位置時自動停止。在完成錄製後、請按下機

( ) 和按下

Player

帶將在到達零位置時自動停止。

zero memory

在下列情況下、zero memory 模式可能自

•

動取消：

- 在標記有零記憶功能部分的完結處。

- 當錄影帶被彈出時。

- 當您取出電池組或移除電源時。零記憶可能在錄影帶上的錄製具有間隔時

•

無法正確發揮功能。只有在使用遙控器時才能使用零記憶功

•

能。

Player

。（僅適用於

TAPE

Camera

按鈕。

MODE

( ) 指示器的錄影帶計時器會

）

模式下操作

VP-D385( i ))

( ) 或

Player

ZERO

按鈕以設定播放

按鈕。錄影

(REW)

臺灣 _39

39_ English

2.

3.

4.

BA

TT .

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

16BIt

S

10Sec

C.Nite 1/30

60min

0:00:30

SP

STBY

10Sec

16:9 Wide

SELF RECORD USING THE REMOTE CONTROL (SETTING THE SELF TIMER) (VP-D382( i )/

The SELF TIMER function works only in Camera mode. ➥page 18

•

When you use the SELF TIMER function on the remote control, the

•

recording begins automatically in 10 seconds.

1. Set the Select switch to TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only)

2. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ).

3. Press the SELF TIMER button.

The ( ) indicator is displayed.

•

4. To record movie images, press the Recording start/stop button.

Self timer starts counting down from 10. At this

•

moment, recording indicator blinks with a beep sound. At the last second of the countdown, recording

•

starts automatically. If you want to cancel the self timer function

•

before recording, press the SELF TIMER, button again.

Do not obstruct the remote control sensor

•

by putting obstacles between the remote control and miniDV camcorder. The remote control maximum range is 4 to

•

5m (13 to17 ft). The effective remote control angle is up to

•

30 degrees left /right from the centre line. Using a tripod (not supplied) is

•

recommended during self record.

D382H/

D385( i ) ONLY)

(VP-D385( i ) only)

使用遙控器自行錄製（設定

VP-D382(i)/D382H/D385(i))

於

SELF TIMER 功能僅可在

•

當您在遙控器上使用 SELF TIMER 功能時、錄製將在 10 秒鐘後自動

•

開始。

將選擇開關設定為

1.

按下

MODE

2.

按下

SELF TIMER

3.

( )

•

要錄製影片影像、請按下

4.

自拍計時器將從 10 開始倒數。同時、錄製指

•

示器閃爍時伴有嗶聲。在進入倒計時的最後一秒時、會自動開始錄

•

製。若您要在錄製前取消自拍計時器功能、請按

•

下

•

SELF TIMER

模式下操作。➥第 18 頁

Camera

TAPE

按鈕以設定

。（僅適用於

Camera

）（僅適用

VP-D385( i ))

( ).

按鈕。

指示器會顯示。

錄製開始 / 停止

SELF TIMER

按鈕。

請勿在遙控器或 miniDV 攝錄放影機之間擺放障礙物以免阻隔遙控器感應窗。遙控器範圍介於 4 至 5 公尺（13 至 17 英呎）。有效的遙控器角度介於中線左 / 右 30 度。建議在自錄製時使用三腳架（未提供）。

按鈕。

40_ English

臺灣 _40

basic recording

錄製搜尋(

3.

4.

5.

MODE

PO

W

ER

C

H G

VO

L

M E

N U

16BIt

60min

0:00:00

SP

16:9 Wide

REVIEWING AND SEARCHING A RECORDING

The Rec Search function works only in Camera mode. ➥page 18

•

Used to review previously recorded images or to  nd a point to

•

record a new image in the STBY mode.

基本錄製

檢視和搜尋錄製

錄製搜尋功能僅可在

•

可用於檢視之前已錄製的影像或在 STBY 模式下尋找要錄製新影像

•

的點。

模式下操作。➥第 18 頁

Camera

Record Search (Joystick

)

1. Set the Select switch to TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only)

2. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ).

3. To start recording, press the Recording start/stop

button.

4. Set to STBY mode by pressing Recording start/ stop button again.

5. To perform the backward search:

Move the Joystick () to the left.

•

- While you press and hold the Joystick (), the selected images will be played in reverse order. Press and release the Joystick () to play the images in reverse order for 3 seconds before resetting the play order to normal.

To perform the normal search:

Move the Joystick () to the right.

•

- While you press and hold the Joystick (),

the selected images will be played in normal order. To resume recording when your record search is done, press the Recording start/stop button.

Mosaic shaped distortion may appear on the screen while

•

in Record Search mode. Pressing Recording start/stop button after rec search will

•

overwrite the images recorded after that point.

錄製搜尋(

Joystick

)

1. 將選擇開關設定為 TAPE。(僅適用於 VP-D385( i ))

2. 按下 MODE 按鈕以設定 Camera ( )。

3. 若要開始錄製、請按下錄製開始/停止按鈕。

4.

再次按下錄製開始/停止按鈕以設定為 STBY 模式。

5. 若要執行向後搜尋：

向左移動

•

- 在您按住來播放所選影像。在將播放順序重設為正常之前、按下並釋放順序播放影像 3 秒鐘。

Joystick

()。

(), 時、將以相反順序

() 會以相反

Joystick

若要執行正常搜尋：

向右移動

•

- 在您按住序播放所選影像。若要在完成錄製搜尋後恢

Joystick

() 。

(), 時、將會以正常順

復錄製、可按下錄製開始 / 停止按鈕。

螢幕在錄製搜尋模式中時可能會顯示馬賽克狀的失真。

•

在錄製搜尋之後按下

•

面的已錄製影像。

錄製開始 / 停止

按鈕、將會覆寫該點後

臺灣 _41

41_ English

USING THE FADE ON AND OFF

MODE

P O

W E

R

C H

G

V

O L

M E

N U

若要停止錄製

5.

10Sec

16Bit

S

60min

0:00:00

SP

STBY

Fade On

2.

3.

Fade On

10Sec

16Bit

C.Nite 1/30

S

60min

0:00:00

SP

STBY

The Fade function works only in Camera mode.

•

➥

page 18

You can give your recording a professional look

•

by using special effects such as fade in at the beginning of a sequence or fade out at the end of a sequence.

使用

FADE ON

•

和關閉

淡化功能僅可在透過使用特殊效果、您可使您的錄製看起來更專業、如在錄製順序開始時使用淡入或在順序結束時使用淡出。

模式下操作。➥第 18 頁

Camera

To Start Recording

1. Set the Select switch to TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only)

2. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ).

3. Before recording, press the Joystick and then

move the Joystick () to the right.

•

4. Press the Recording start/stop button and at the same time release the Fade function.

•

To Stop Recording

5. When you want to stop recording with fade out,

press the Joystick, then move the Joystick () to the right.

•

6. Press the Recording start/stop button to stop

recording.

•

Move the Joystick () to the right fade function to select "Fade On".

Recording starts and the picture and sound gradually appear. (Fade In)

Move the Joystick () to the right fade function to select "Fade On".

The picture and sound

Fade In (Approx. 4 seconds)

gradually disappear. (Fade Out)

開始錄製

將選擇開關設定為

1.

按下

2.

在錄製之前、請按下

3.

Joystick

•

按下

4.

•

按鈕以設定

MODE

()

將

Joystick

"Fade On"

錄製開始 / 停止

錄製開始、畫面及音效會漸漸出現。（淡入）

若要停止錄製

若想使用淡出功能停止錄製、可按下

5.

後向右移動

•

Fade Out (Approx. 4 seconds)

Joystick

將

Joystick

"Fade On"

。（僅適用於

TAPE

Joystick

Camera

VP-D385( i ))

( ).

然後向右移動

() 移至右側的淡化功能以選擇

。

按鈕、同時解除淡化功能。

()

() 移至右側的淡化功能以選擇

Joystick

。

按下

6.

錄製開始 / 停止

停止錄製。

畫面和音效會漸漸消失。

•

（淡出）

按鈕以

、然

42_ English

臺灣 _42

basic recording

AutoFocus

ManualFocus

a.

設定焦距

2.

3.

4.

M O

D E

P O

W E

R

CHG.

V O

L

M

E N

U

5.

16Bit

S

10Sec

60min

0:00:30

SP

STBY

Manual Focus

AUTO FOCUS / MANUAL FOCUS

•

Auto Focus

•

Manual Focus

•

a. A picture containing several objects, some close to

b. A person enveloped in fog or surrounded by snow. c. Very shiny or glossy surfaces like a car. d. People or objects moving constantly or quickly like

Setting the Focus

1. Set the Select switch to CARD or TAPE.

2. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ).

3. Press the Joystick.

4.

5. To exit, press the Joystick.

The Auto Focus/Manual Focus function works in both Camera and M.Cam modes. ➥page 18 In most situations, it is better to use the automatic focus feature, as it enables you to concentrate on the creative side of your recording. Manual focussing may be necessary under certain conditions that make

automatic focussing dif cult or unreliable.

Adjust the Auto Focus / Manual Focus functions only by using the Joystick.

If you are inexperienced in the use of camcorders, we recommend that you make use of auto focus.

In the following situations, you may obtain better results by adjusting the focus manually.

the camcorder, others further away.

an athlete or a crowd.

(VP-D385( i ) only)

Quick menu will appear.

•

Move down the Joystick (▼) to select the "Manual Focus" mode.

You can toggle between "Auto Focus" and "Manual

•

Focus" by moving down the Joystick (▼). Move the Joystick (

•

the desired manual focus value, then press the Joystick.

Manual focus indicator ( ) and the status bar

•

will be displayed on the LCD screen.

Manual focus is not available in the EASY.Q mode.



/ ) left or right to select

a

c

基本錄製

AUTO FOCUS / MANUAL FOCUS

Auto Focus/Manual Focus 功能可在

•

➥

第 18 頁

在大多數情況下、使用自動對焦功能更為恰當、因為它允許您專注

•

於創意錄製。當在特定條件下無法進行自動對焦和 / 或自動對焦變得不可靠時、

•

可能就需要使用手動對焦。

b

僅透過使用 Joystick 調整

•

Focus

Camera

功能。

AutoFocus

若您沒有使用攝錄放影機的經驗、我們建議您

•

充分利用自動對焦。

d

ManualFocus

在以下情況中、透過手動調整焦距將可讓您獲

•

得更佳效果。

圖片包含數個物體、各與攝錄放影機有不同距離。

a.

被霧包圍或雪景中的人物。

b.

非常閃亮的表面、如汽車。

c.

持續或快速移動的人物或物體、如運動員或人群。

d.

設定焦距

將選擇開關設定為

1.

VP-D385( i ))

按下

MODE

2.

按下

Joystick

3.

快速選單將會出現。

•

向下移動

4.

式。

您可以透過向下移動

•

Focus"

向左或向右移動

•

動對焦值、然後按下 Joystick。

要結束、請按下

5.

Manual focus 指示器 ( ) 和狀態列將會顯示在

•

LCD 螢幕上。

Manual focus

按鈕以設定

。

Joystick

和

"Manual Focus"

Joystick

CARD

(▼) 以選擇

不可在

M.Cam

和

Auto Focus/Manual

或

TAPE

( ).

Camera

"Manual Focus"



Joystick

之間進行切換。

( / ) 以選擇所需的手

Joystick

。

EASY.Q

模式下操作。

。（僅適用於

( ▼ ) 在

模式下使用。

模

"Auto

臺灣 _43

43_ English

1.

3.

設定快門速度

4.

MODE

P O

W

ER

C

H G

V

O L

M

E N

U

5.

6.

16Bit

C.Nite 1/30

S

10Sec

Manual Exposure

60min

0:00:30

SP

STBY

18

5.

設定

16Bit

10Sec

C.Nite 1/30

S

60min

0:00:30

SP

STBY

Manual Shutter

1/120

SETTING THE SHUTTER SPEED & EXPOSURE

The Shutter Speed function works only in Camera mode. ➥page 18

•

The Exposure function works in both Camera and M.Cam modes. ➥page 18

•

Adjust the Shutter Speed and Exposure functions only by using the Joystick.

•

1.

Set the Select switch to CARD or TAPE. (VP-D385(

2. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ).

3. Press the Joystick.

Quick menu will appear.

•

Setting the Shutter Speed

4. Move the Joystick () to the left to select "Auto Shutter

( )" mode.

In Auto mode, move up the Joystick (▲) to switch the

•

mode to manual. You can also toggle between Auto Shutter and Manual

•

Shutter by moving up the Joystick (▲).

5. Move the Joystick ( shutter speed value, then press the Joystick.

Shutter speed can be set to "1/50", "1/120", "1/250", "1/500",

•

"1/1000", "1/2000", "1/4000" or "1/10000" of a second.

Setting the Exposure

4. Move up the Joystick (▲) ( )" mode.

In Auto mode, move up the Joystick (▲) to switch the

•

mode to manual. You can also toggle between Auto Exposure and

•

Manual Exposure by moving up the Joystick (▲).

5. Move the Joystick ( exposure value, then press the Joystick.

Exposure value can be set between "00" to "29".

•

6. To exit, press the Joystick.

Selected settings are displayed.

•

Recommended Shutter Speeds when Recording

Outdoor sports such as golf or tennis: "1/2000" or "1/4000"

•

Moving cars or trains or other rapidly moving vehicles such as roller coasters:

•

"1/1000", "1/500" or "1/250" Indoor sports such as basketball: "1/120"

•

If you manually change the shutter speed and the exposure value

•

when program AE option is selected, manual changes are applied  rst.

The image may not seem as smooth when a high shutter speed is set.

•

The camcorder returns to the auto shutter and auto exposure settings

•

when you change to the EASY.Q mode. When recording with a shutter speed of 1/1000 or higher, make sure

•

the sun is not shining into the lens.

/ ) left or right to select the desired



to select "

/ ) left or right to select the desired



Auto Exposure

i

) only)

SHUTTER SPEED 和 EXPOSURE

設定

Shutter Speed

•

曝光功能可在

•

僅透過使用 Joystick 調整

•

功能僅可在

1.

2.

3.

Camera

M.Cam

和

Shutter Speed

將選擇開關設定為按下按下

MODE

Joystick.

快速選單將會出現

•

按鈕以設定

模式下操作。➥第 18 頁

模式下操作。 ➥第 18 頁

和 Exposure 功能。

或

CARD

TAPE

( ).

Camera

設定快門速度

向左移動

4.

在自動模式下、向上移動

•

動模式。您還可以透過向上移動

•

和 Manual Shutter 之間進行切換。

向左或向右移動

5.

速度值、然後按下

可以被設定為每秒

•

"1/1000","1/2000","1/4000"或"1/10000"。

Exposure

設定

向左或向右移動

4.

( )"

在自動模式下、向上移動

•

動模式。您還可以透過向上移動

•

Exposure 和 Manual Exposure 之間進行切換。

向左或向右移動

5.

然後按下

曝光值可設定在

•

要結束、請按下

6.

會顯示所選擇的設定。

•

Joystick

模式。

Joystick

以選擇

"Auto Shutter ( )"

()

Joystick

/



(

。

Joystick

"1/50","1/120","1/250","1/500",

( ▲ ) 以選擇

Joystick

/





(

。

"00"至"29"

。

錄製時建議使用的快門速度

高爾夫或網球等戶外運動 :

•

移動的汽車或火車或其他快速移動的車子、如雲霄飛車 :

•

或

"1/250"

籃球等室內運動：

•

若您在選擇了程式 AE 選項時手動變更快門速度和曝光值、手動變更將

•

被首先套用。在設定很高的快門速度時、影像可能顯得不柔和。

•

攝錄放影機將在您變更至 EASY.Q 模式時返回自動快門和自動曝光設定。

•

當以 1/1000 或以上的快門速度進行錄製時、確保陽光沒有照進透鏡內。

•

"1/2000"或"1/4000"

"1/120"

。（僅適用於

VP-D385(

( ▲ ) 以切換為手

( ▲ ) 在 Auto Shutter

以選擇所需的快門



)

"Auto Exposure

( ▲ ) 以切換為手

( ▲ ) 在 Auto

以選擇所需的曝光值、

)

之間。

"1/1000","1/500"

i

模式。

))

44_ English

臺灣 _44

advanced recording

1.

3.

4.

A

V

D

V

B A

TT .

M

E

N

U

W

T

M

O

D

E

P

O

W

E

R

C

H

G

BA

TT .

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

5.

6.

7.

Audio Mode WindCut Plus Real Sterco

MENU

✔ SP

LP

Move Select Exi t

Camera Mode

Record

Rec Mode

Move Select Exi t

Audio Mode WindCut Plus Real Sterco

Camera Mode

MENU

Record

Rec Mode

✔ 12Bit

16Bit

SELECTING THE RECORD MODE & AUDIO MODE (REC MODE & AUDIO MODE)

The Record mode function works in both Camera and Player

•

modes. ➥page 18 This camcorder records and plays back in SP (standard play)

•

mode and in LP (long play) mode.

- "SP" : This mode allows 60 minutes of recording time with

- "LP" : This mode allows 90 minutes of recording time with

The Audio mode function works in both Camera and Player

•

modes. ➥page 18 This camcorder records sound in two ways. (12Bit,16Bit)

•

- "12Bit" : You can record two 12Bit stereo sound tracks.

- "16Bit" : You can record one high quality stereo

1. Set the Select switch to TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only)

2. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ) or Player ( ).

3. Press the MENU button.

The menu list will appear

•

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Record", then press the Joystick or move the Joystick () to the right.

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Rec Mode"or "Audio Mode", then press the Joystick.

6. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select the desired

record mode or audio mode, then press the Joystick.

Rec mode can be set to "SP" or "LP".

•

Audio mode can be set to "12Bit" or "16Bit".

•

7.

To exit, press the MENU button.

The selected indicator is displayed.

•

When "12Bit" is selected, no indicator is displayed.

•

CAUTION

a DVM60 tape.

The original stereo sound can be recorded onto the main (Sound1) track. Additional stereo sound can be dubbed onto the sub (Sound2) track.

soundtrack using 16Bit recording mode. Audio dubbing is not possible when using this mode.

We recommend that you use this camcorder to play back

•

any tapes recorded on this camcorder. Playing back a tape recorded in other equipment may produce mosaic shaped distortion. When you record a tape in SP and LP modes, or LP

•

mode only, the playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be written properly if there is a gap between scenes. Record using SP mode for best picture and sound quality.

•

To edit audio on your camcorder, you must set 12Bit for the Audio mode and SP for the Rec mode.

(VP-D385( i ) only)

進階錄製

選擇錄製模式和聲訊模式（

錄製模式功能可在

•

➥

第 18 頁

此攝錄放影機可在

•

模式中進行錄製和播放。

-

: 此模式使用

"SP"

-

: 此模式使用

"LP"

聲訊模式功能可在

•

➥

第 18 頁

此攝錄放影機以兩種方式錄製音效。

•

-

"12Bit"

-

"16Bit"

開關設定為

1.將選擇

按下

MODE

2.

按下

MENU

3.

將顯示選單清單

•

向上或向下移動

4.

後按下

Joystick

向上或向下移動

5.

"Audio Mode"

向上或向下移動

6.

或聲訊模式、然後按下

錄製模式可被設定為

•

聲訊模式可被設定為

•

要結束、可按下

7.

所選指示器會顯示。

•

當選擇了

•

我們建議您使用本攝錄放影機來播放任何在本機上

•

錄製的錄影帶。播放其他設備所錄製的錄影帶將可能產生馬賽克狀失真。當您在 SP 及 LP 模式、或僅 LP 模式中錄製錄影帶

•

時、若場景之間有間隔、播放畫面可能會失真或時間代碼可能不會正確寫入。使用 SP 模式進行錄製以獲取最佳的畫面與音效品質。

•

若要編輯攝錄放影機上的聲訊、您必須將設定為

注意

REC

Camera

SP

製時間。

Camera

:

您可以錄製兩首 12 位元的立體聲曲目。原始立體聲可被錄製到主（音效 1）曲目。附加的立體聲可被配到子（音效 2）曲目上。

: 您可以使用 16 位元錄製模式來錄製一段高品

質立體聲。在使用此模式時不可能進行配音。

TAPE

按鈕以設定

按鈕。

Joystick

或向右移動

Joystick

、然後按

Joystick

MENU

"12Bit"

、並將

12Bit

AUDIO

模式和

和

Player

模式）

模式下操作。

（標準播放）模式及 LP（長時間播放）

錄影帶可獲得 60 分鐘的錄

DVM60

錄影帶可獲得 90 分鐘的錄

DVM60

和

模式下操作。

Player

(12Bit,16Bit)

。（僅適用於

Camera

Joystick

"SP"

"12Bit" 或"16Bit"

按鈕。

( ) 或

以選擇

(▲ / ▼)

Joystick

以選擇

(▲ / ▼)

。

以選擇所需的錄製模式

(▲/ ▼)

。

或

"LP"

VP-D385( i ))

( ).

Player

"Record"

()

"Rec Mode"

。

、然

時、不會顯示指示器。

模式

模式設定為 SP。

Rec

Audio

或

臺灣 _45

45_ English

CUTTING OFF WIND NOISE (WINDCUT PLUS)

BA

TT .

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

3.

4.

5.

A

V

D

V

B A

TT .

M

E

N

U

W

T

M

O

D

E

P

O

W

E

R

C

H

G

6.

Move Select Exi t

Audio Mode WindCut Plus Real Sterco

Camera Mode

MENU

Record

Rec Mode

Off Auto

✔ On

16Bit

10Sec

C.Nite 1/30

S

60min

0:00:30

SP

STBY

16:9 Wide

The windcut plus function works in both Camera

•

and Player (Audio dubbing) modes. ➥page 18 Use the windcut plus when recording in windy

•

places such as the beach or near buildings. The windcut plus function minimises wind or other

•

noises while recording.

- When the windcut plus is on, some low pitched tones are eliminated along with the sound of the wind.

1. Set the Select switch to TAPE. (VP-D385(

2. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ) or Player ( ).

3. Press the MENU button.

The menu list will appear

•

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Record", then press the Joystick or move the Joystick () to the right.

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "WindCut Plus", then press the Joystick.

6. To activate the windcut plus function, move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select the windcut plus type, then press the Joystick.

"Off": Disables the function

•

"Auto": Minimises the wind noise while

•

"On": Removes the low pitched wind noise.

•

7. To exit, press the MENU button.

WindCut Plus ( "On" ( ) or "Auto" ( ))

•

indicator is displayed.

Make sure windcut plus is set to off when you want the microphone to be as sensitive as possible.

preserving voices.

i

) only)

(VP-D385( i ) only)

消除風聲(

WINDCUT PLUS

消除風聲功能可在

•

dubbing)

在沙灘或靠近建築物等有風吹的地方錄製時使用消

•

除風聲功能。消除風聲功能可在錄製時減低風聲或其他噪音。

•

- 當開啟消除風聲時、一些低沉音調將和風聲一

)

和

Camera

模式下操作。 ➥第 18 頁

Player (Audio

起被消除。

將選擇開關設定為

1.

按下

2.

( ).

按下

3.

•

向上或向下移動

4.

"Record" Joystick

向上或向下移動

5.

"WindCut Plus"

若要啟動消除風聲功能、可向上或向下移動

6.

Joystick

下

•

要結束、可按下

7.

•

按鈕以設定

MODE

按鈕。

MENU

將會顯示選單清單

、然後按下

()

(▲ / ▼) 以選擇消除風聲類型、然後按

。

Joystick

: 停用功能

"Off"

: 保留聲音同時減低風聲。

"Auto"

: 可消除低沉音調的風聲。

"On"

WindCut Plus

示器會顯示。

。（僅適用於

TAPE

Camera

(▲ / ▼) 以選擇

Joystick

(▲ / ▼)以選擇

Joystick

、然後按下

按鈕。

MENU

(

( ) 或

"On"

( ) 或

或向右移動

Joystick

"Auto"

當您希望麥克風的收音能儘量敏感時、確保將

windcut plus

設定為關閉。

VP-D385(

Player

。

( )) 指

i

))

46_ English

臺灣 _46

advanced recording

BA

TT .

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

A

V

D

V

B A

TT .

M

E

N

U

W

T

M

O

D

E

P

O

W

E

R

C

H

G

Move Select Exi t

Audio Mode WindCut Plus Real Sterco

Camera Mode

MENU

Record

Rec Mode

Off

✔ On

16BIt

10Sec

C.Nite 1/30

60min

0:00:30

SP

STBY

S

16:9 Wide

SELECTING THE REAL STEREO FUNCTION (REAL STEREO)

The Real Stereo function works only in Camera

•

mode. ➥page 18 Real stereo enhances the left and right input

•

signals when using the internal microphone.

1. Set the Select switch to TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only)

2. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ).

3. Press the MENU button.

The menu list will appear

•

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Record", then press the Joystick or move the Joystick () to the right.

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Real Stereo", then press the Joystick.

6. To activate the Real Stereo function, move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "On", then

press the Joystick.

If you do not want to use the Real Stereo

•

function, set the "Real Stereo" menu to "Off".

7. To exit, press the MENU button.

Real Stereo ( S ) indicator is displayed.

•

進階錄製

選擇逼真立體聲功能(

•

(VP-D385( i ) only)

•

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

REAL STEREO

Real Stereo

➥

第 18 頁

功能僅可在

)

Camera

模式下操作。

真立體聲功能可在使用內置麥克風時增強左右輸入訊號。

將選擇開關設定為

按下

•

按鈕以設定

MODE

按鈕。

MENU

將顯示選單清單

向上或向下移動

、然後按下

"Record"

()

Joystick

向上或向下移動

、然後按下

Stereo"

TAPE

Joystick

。（僅適用於

Camera

(VP-D385( i

( ).

(▲ / ▼) 以選擇

或向右移動

(▲/ ▼) 以選擇

。

"Real

若要啟動電視機顯示功能、可向上或向下移

動

Joystick

•

要結束、可按下

•

Joystick

。

(▲ / ▼) 以選擇

"On"

、然後按下

若您不希望使用逼真立體聲功能、可將

選單設定為

Stereo"

Real Stereo

MENU

(S ) 指示器會顯示。

"Off"

按鈕。

。

"Real

))

臺灣 _47

47_ English

SETTING THE PROGRAM AE (PROGRAM AE)

BA

TT .

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

A

V

D

V

B A

TT .

M

E

N

U

W

T

M

O

D

E

P

O

W

E

R

C

H

G

Move Select Exi t

White Balance Visual Effect 16:9 Wide Macro DIS

Camera Mode

MENU

Camera

Program AE

�

Auto

� Auto � Off � On

�

Off

�

Off

Move Select Exi t

White Balance Visual Effect 16:9 Wide Macro DIS

Camera Mode

MENU

Camera

Program AE

✔ Auto

Sports Portrait Spotight Sand/Snow High Speed

The Program AE function works only in Camera

•

mode. ➥page 18 The Program AE mode allows you to adjust shutter

•

speeds and apertures to suit different recording conditions.

They give you creative control over the depth of  eld.

•

1. Set the Select switch to TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only)

2. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ).

3. Press the MENU button.

The menu list will appear

•

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Camera", then press the Joystick or move the Joystick () to the right.

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Program AE", then press the Joystick.

The available options are listed.

•

6. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select the desired program AE option, then press the

Joystick.

7. To exit, press the MENU button.

The indicator of the selected mode is displayed.

•

When the "Auto" mode is selected, no indicator

•

is displayed.

(VP-D385( i ) only)

設定程式自動曝光(

Program AE

•

➥

第 18 頁

Program AE

•

整快門速度和光圈。它們使您可對景深進行具創意的控制。

•

. 將選擇開關設定為

1

按下

2.

按下

3.

將顯示選單清單

•

向上或向下移動

4.

"Camera" Joystick

向上或向下移動

5.

"Program AE"

可用的選項將會列出。

•

向上或向下移動

6.

程式自動曝光選項、然後按下

要結束、可按下

7.

選定模式的指示器將會顯示。

•

當選擇了

•

器。

PROGRAM AE

功能僅可在

)

Camera

模式允許您根據不同的錄製條件來調

。（僅適用於

TAPE

按鈕以設定

MODE

MENU

按鈕。

、然後按下

()

Camera

(▲ / ▼) 以選擇

Joystick

(▲ / ▼) 以選擇

Joystick

、然後按下

(▲ / ▼) 以選擇所需的

Joystick

按鈕。

MENU

模式時、將不會顯示任何指示

"Auto"

模式下操作。

VP-D385( i

( )。

或向右移動

。

))

48_ English

臺灣 _48

advanced recording

SETTING THE PROGRAM AE (PROGRAM AE)

Settings Contents

- Auto balance between the subject and the background.

Auto

Sports

Portrait

Spotlight

Sand/Snow

High Speed

- To be used in normal conditions.

- The shutter speed is automatically adjusted from 1/50 to 1/250 per second, depending on the scene.

- Reduces blurring when recording rapidly moving subjects such as in golf or tennis games. If the Sports mode is used under

a uorescent light, the image may icker.

In this case, use the Auto mode for recording.

- Creates a shallow depth of eld so that

the person or subject appears against a softened background.

- The portrait mode is most effective when used outdoors.

- The shutter speed is automatically adjusted from 1/50 to 1/1000 per second.

- Prevents overexposure of subject’s face, etc. when strong light strikes the subject, as in a wedding or on stage.

- Prevents underexposure of subject’s

face, etc. in a place where reection of

light is intense, such as at the beach in midsummer or on a ski slope.

- For recording fast-moving subjects such as players in golf or tennis games.

The Program AE function will not operate in EASY.Q mode.

•

The Program AE cannot be set when the Shutter Speed or

•

the Exposure is set to manual.

On-screen

display

進階錄製

設定程式自動曝光(

設定內容

Auto

Sports

Portrait

Spotlight

Sand/ Snow

HighSpeed

Program AE

•

當將

•

Program AE

PROGRAM AE

- 自動平衡主體和背景。

- 在正常情況下使用。

- 快門速度視場景而在每秒 1/50 到 1/250 的範圍內自動調整。

- 在快速錄製移動的主體（如高爾夫或網球比賽）時減少模糊。如果在螢光燈下使用「體育」模式、則影像可能會閃爍。在此情況下、使用「自動」模式進行錄製。

- 建立場景的淺深度以便人物或主體處於柔和的背景中。

- 人像模式在戶外使用時最有效。

-

shutter speed

1/1000 的範圍內自動調整。

-

防止主體面部曝光過度、例如在婚禮或舞台上強光照射主體時。

-

防止主體面部等在強烈反光下曝光、如仲夏的海邊或滑雪坡上。

- 用於錄製快速移動的主體、如高爾夫或網球比賽中的選手。

功能不可在

Shutter Speed 或 Exposure

。

)

可在每秒 1/50 至

模式下操作。

EASY.Q

設定為手動時、不能設定

畫面顯示

語言

臺灣 _49

49_ English

SETTING THE WHITE BALANCE (WHITE BALANCE)

BA

TT .

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

A

V

D

V

B A

TT .

M

E

N

U

W

T

M

O

D

E

P

O

W

E

R

C

H

G

Move Select Exi t

White Balance Visual Effect 16:9 Wide Macro DIS

Camera Mode

MENU

Camera

Program AE

�

Auto

� Auto � Off � On

�

Off

�

Off

Move Select Exi t

White Balance Visual Effect 16:9 Wide Macro DIS

Camera Mode

MENU

Camera

Program AE

✔ Auto

Daylight Cloudy Fluorescent Tungsten Custom WB

The White Balance function works in both Camera

•

and M.Cam modes. ➥page 18 The White Balance is a recording function that

•

preserves the unique image colour of the object in any recording condition. You may select the appropriate White Balance

•

mode to obtain good quality image colour.

1. Set the Select switch to CARD or TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only)

2. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ).

3. Press the MENU button.

The menu list will appear

•

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Camera", then press the Joystick or move the Joystick () to the right.

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "White Balance", then press the Joystick.

The available options are listed.

•

6. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select the desired white balance mode, then press the

Joystick.

7. To exit, press the MENU button.

The indicator of the selected mode is

•

displayed. When the "Auto" mode is selected, no

•

indicator is displayed.

(VP-D385( i ) only)

設定白平衡(

WHITE BALANCE

White Balance

•

下操作。 ➥第 18 頁

White Balance

•

影像顏色的錄製功能。您可選擇適當的

•

良的影像顏色。

將選擇開關設定為

1.

（僅適用於

按下

2.

按下

3.

將會顯示選單清單

•

向上或向下移動

4.

"Camera" Joystick

向上或向下移動

5.

"White Balance"

可用的選項將會列出。

•

向上或向下移動

6.

白平衡模式、然後按下

要結束、可按下

7.

選定模式的指示器將會顯示。

•

當選擇了

•

器。

功能可在

是在任何錄製條件下保持物體獨特

White Balance

VP-D385( i

按鈕以設定

MODE

按鈕。

MENU

Joystick

、然後按下

()

Joystick

、然後按下

Joystick

MENU

"Auto"

)

Camera 和 M.Cam

模式以取得品質優

或

TAPE

Camera

(▲ / ▼)

Joystick

(▲/ ▼)

。

( ).

以選擇

或向右移動

以選擇

。

以選擇所需的

。

CARD

))

Joystick

按鈕。

模式時、將不會顯示任何指示

模式

50_ English

臺灣 _50

AV

DV

BA T T.

MENU

W

T

MODE

POWER

CHG

Art

S

16BIt

10Sec

C.Nite 1/30

60min

0:00:30

SP

STBY

16:9 Wide

paper

advanced recording

Settings

This option is generally used to control the white

Auto

balance automatically.

Daylight

Cloudy

Fluorescent

Tungsten

Custom WB

Setting the white balance manually :

1. Select "Custom WB".

•

2. Frame a white object such as a piece of paper so that

it  lls the screen. Use an object that is not transparent.

•

3. Press the Joystick.

•

This controls the white balance according to the outdoor ambience, especially for close up and when the subject is of one dominant colour.

This option is used when you make a recording in cloudy weather.

This option is used when you make a recording

under white  uorescent lights.

This option is used when the surroundings are less than 3200K of tungsten lights.

You can manually adjust white balance to match the light source or situation

The indicator ( ) and the message "Set white balance" are displayed.

If the object that  lls the screen is not focussed,

correct the focus using "Manual Focus" ➥page 42

The white balance setting will be applied and indicator ( ) is displayed.

The White Balance function will not operate in

•

EASY.Q mode. It is recommended that you specify "Digital Zoom"

•

to "Off" before setting white balance. ➥page 57 Reset the white balance if lighting conditions

•

change. During normal outdoor recording, setting to Auto

•

may provide better results. Pressing the MENU button while setting the Custom

•

WB will cancel the Custom WB setting and sets the White Balance to "Auto".

Contents

On-screen

display

進階錄製

設定內容

Auto

Daylight

Cloudy

Fluorescent

Tungsten

CustomWB

White thick

paper

此選項一般用來自動控制白平衡。

這將根據戶外環境控制白平衡、尤其針對特寫和主體顏色突出時。

當您在陰天進行錄製時使用此選項。

當您在白色螢光燈下進行錄製時使用此選項。

在小於 3200K 的鎢絲燈環境下使用此選項。

您可以手動調整白平衡以適應光源或環境情況

手動設定白平衡 :

選擇

"Custom WB"

1.

指示器 ( ) 和訊息

•

將白色物體（如一張紙）框住以便它填滿螢幕。

2.

使用不透明的物體。

如果沒有對焦填充螢幕的物體、請使用

•

"Manual Focus"

按下

Joystick

3.

將會套用

•

( )。

•

畫面顯示

。

"Set white balance"

修正對焦 ➥第 42 頁

。

white balance

White Balance

操作。建議在設定白平衡之前將指定為

"Off"

在燈光條件變更時重設白平衡。

設定和顯示指示器

功能不可在

。 ➥第 57 頁。

"Digital Zoom"

EASY.Q

在進行普通戶外錄製期間、設定為可提供更佳效果。在設定會取消設定為

Custom WB Custom WB

"Auto"

時按下

MENU

設定、並且會將白平衡

。

語言

會顯示。

模式下

將

Auto

按鈕將

臺灣 _51

51_ English

APPLYING VISUAL EFFECTS (VISUAL EFFECT)

BA

TT .

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

A

V

D

V

B A

TT .

M

E

N

U

W

T

M

O

D

E

P

O

W

E

R

C

H

G

S

16BIt

10Sec

C.Nite 1/30

60min

0:00:30

SP

STBY

Art

Move Select Exi t

White Balance Visual Effect 16:9 Wide Macro DIS

Camera Mode

MENU

Camera

Program AE

Off

✔

Art Mosaic Sepia Negative Mirror

The visual effect function works only in Camera

•

mode. ➥page 18 The visual effects enable you to give a creative

•

look to your recording. Select the appropriate visual effect for the type of

•

picture that you wish to record and the effect you wish to create. There are 10 visual effect modes.

1. Set the Select switch to TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only)

2. press the MODE button to set

3. Press the MENU button.

The menu list will appear.

•

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Camera", then press the Joystick or move the Joystick () to the right.

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Visual Effect", then press the Joystick.

The available options are listed.

•

6. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select the desired visual effect option, then press the Joystick.

The display mode is set to the selected mode.

•

7. To exit, press the MENU button.

套用視訊效果(

(VP-D385( i ) only)

Camera ( ).

VISUAL EFFECT

Visual effect

•

➥

第 18 頁

Visual effect

•

為您要錄製的圖片類型以及您要建立的效果選擇適

•

當的視訊效果。共有

將選擇開關設定為

1.

按下

2.

按下

3.

•

向上或向下移動

4.

"Camera" Joystick

向上或向下移動

5.

Effect"

•

向上或向下移動

6.

visual effect

•

要結束、可按下

7.

按鈕以設定

MODE

按鈕。

MENU

將顯示選單清單。

、然後按下

()

、然後按下

可用的選項將會列出。

顯示模式將被設定為所選擇的模式。

)

功能僅可在

讓您可以在錄製中加入創意元素。

10

TAPE

Joystick

。

Joystick

選項、然後按下

MENU

模式下操作。

Camera

種視訊效果模式。

。（僅適用於

Camera

VP-D385( i

( ).

(▲ / ▼) 以選擇

或向右移動

(▲ / ▼) 以選擇

。

(▲ / ▼) 以選擇所需的

。

Joystick

按鈕。

))

"Visual

52_ English

臺灣 _52

advanced recording

Settings Contents

Off Disables the function.

Art

1

Mosaic

2

Sepia

3

Negative

4

Mirror

5

BLK&WHT

6

Emboss1

7

Emboss2

8

Pastel1

9

Pastel2

󱯠

•

This mode gives the images a coarse effect.

This mode gives the images a mosaic effect.

This mode gives the images a reddish-brown pigment.

This mode reverses the colours, creating a negative image.

This mode cuts the picture in half, using a mirror effect.

This mode changes the images to black and white.

This mode creates a 3D effect (embossing).

This mode creates a 3D effect (embossing) on surrounding area of an image.

This mode applies a pale pastel drawing effect to an image.

This mode applies a pale pastel drawing effect to surrounding area of an image.

"Mirror" mode is not available in the "16:9 Wide" mode.

Release the 16:9 Wide mode rst to set Mirror

Visual Effect modes are not available while EASY.Q is in use. The "Mosaic”, "Mirror", "Emboss2", "Pastel1" and "Pastel2" modes are not available while DIS or C.Nite is in use. (Once

"DIS" or "C.Nite" is set, "Mosaic", "Mirror", "Emboss2" , "Pastel1" or "Pastel2" mode will be released.) "Digital Zoom" is not available in the "Mosaic", "Mirror", "Emboss2" , "Pastel1" or "Pastel2" mode.

1 5

mode. ➥page 53

3 42

進階錄製

設定內容

Off

Art

1

Mosaic

2

Sepia

3

Negative

4

Mirror

5

BLK&WHT

6

Emboss1

7

Emboss2

8

Pastel1

9

Pastel2

󱯠

•

停用功能。

此模式可賦予影像粗糙效果。

此模式可賦予影像馬賽克效果。

此模式可賦予影像紅褐色的色調。

此模式把顏色倒置、建立一張底片影像。

此模式使用鏡像效果、將圖片剪切一半。

此模式將影像變更為黑白。

此模式將建立 3D 效果（浮雕）。

此模式在影像周圍區域建立 3D 效果（浮雕）。

此模式將淡淡的蠟筆繪畫效果套用到影像上。此模式將淡淡的蠟筆繪畫效果套用到影像的周圍區

域上。

模式在

"Mirror" 16:9 Wide Visual Effect "Mosaic"、"Mirror"、"Emboss2"

模式在

"C.Nite" "Pastel1"或"Pastel2" "Digital Zoom" "Pastel1"或"Pastel2"

"16:9 Wide"

模式以設定

模式在

"C.Nite"

和

DIS

之後、將會解除

不可在

模式中不可用。首先解除

模式。 ➥第 53 頁

Mirror

中不可使用。

EASY.Q

中不可使用。（在設定

模式。）

"Mosaic"、"Mirror"、"Emboss2"

模式中使用。

"Pastel1"

和

"DIS"

"Pastel2"

或

、

"Mosaic"、"Mirror"、"Emboss2"

6

7

8

9

10

臺灣 _53

53_ English

SETTING THE 16:9 WIDE MODE (16:9 WIDE)

C.Nite 1/30

S

10Sec

W T

No Tape !

12:00 1.JAN.2008

29

1/50

M

60min

0:00:00

SP

16:9 Wide

STBY

Move Select Exi t

White Balance Visual Effect 16:9 Wide Macro DIS

Camera Mode

MENU

Camera

Program AE

Off

✔ On

Move Select Exi t

White Balance Visual Effect 16:9 Wide Macro DIS

Camera Mode

MENU

Camera

Program AE

�

Auto

� Auto � Off � On

�

Off

�

Off

BA

TT .

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

The 16:9 wide function works only in Camera

•

mode. ➥page 18 Recordings in 16:9 wide will play back naturally

•

only when the TV supports 16:9 aspect ratio. This product is set to 16:9 wide by the factory

•

default.

1. Set the Select switch to TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only).

2. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ).

3. Press the MENU button.

•

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / "Camera", then press the Joystick or move the Joystick () to the right.

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "16:9 Wide", then press the Joystick.

6. To activate the 16:9 wide function, move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "On",

then press the Joystick.

If you do not want to use the 16:9 wide function,

•

set the "16:9 Wide" menu to "Off".

7. To exit, press the MENU button.

16:9 wide indicator is displayed.

•

The menu list will appear.

up or down to select

▼

)

You cannot set the following functions in the 16:9 Wide mode. If you want to use the following functions, set the "16:9 Wide" menu to "Off"  rst.

- "Mirror" (Visual Effect)

(VP-D385( i ) only)

設定16:9寬螢幕模式(

16:9 wide

•

➥

第 18 頁

以

16:9 wide

•

時播放才會顯得自然。透過工廠預設將本產品設定為

•

將選擇開關設定為

1.

按下

MODE

2.

按下

MENU

3.

將會顯示選單清單。

•

向上或向下移動

4.

"Camera" Joystick

向上或向下移動

5.

"16:9 Wide"

若要啟動

6.

動

Joystick

若您不希望使用

•

"16:9 Wide"

要結束、可按下

7.

16:9 寬螢幕指示器會顯示。

•

您不能在想使用以下功能、首先應將設定為

-

16:9 WIDE

功能僅可在

)

Camera

模式下操作。

錄製只能在電視機支援 16:9 長寬比

16:9 wide

。（僅適用於

TAPE

按鈕以設定

Camera

( ).

按鈕。

▼

以選擇

Joystick

、然後按下

()

Joystick

、然後按下

16:9 wide

▼

(▲ /

。

選單設定為

MENU

16:9 Wide

。

"Off"

"Mirror"(Visual Effect

(▲ /

)

或向右移動

Joystick

▼

以選擇

(▲ /

)

。

Joystick

功能、可向上或向下移

以選擇

)

16:9 wide

、然後按下

"On"

功能、可將

。

"Off"

按鈕。

模式中設定以下功能。若

"16:9 Wide"

)

。

VP-D385( i ))

選單

54_ English

臺灣 _54

advanced recording

C.Nite 1/30

16BIt

S

10Sec

W T

No Tape !

12:00 1.JAN.2008

29

1/50

M

60min

0:00:00

SP

16:9 Wide

STBY

Move Select Exi t

White Balance Visual Effect 16:9 Wide Macro DIS

Camera Mode

MENU

Camera

Program AE

Off

✔ On

Move Select Exi t

White Balance Visual Effect 16:9 Wide Macro DIS

Camera Mode

MENU

Camera

Program AE

�

Auto

� Auto � Off � On

�

Off

�

Off

BA

TT .

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

USING THE TELE MACRO (MACRO)

Tele Macro function works in both Camera and M.Cam

•

mode. ➥page 18 Effective focal distance in Tele Macro mode is

•

50 cm (19.7 inches) to 100 cm (39.4 inches).

1. Set the Select switch to CARD or TAPE.

(VP-D385( i ) only).

2. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ).

3. Press the MENU button.

The menu list will appear.

•

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select

"Camera", then press the Joystick or move the Joystick () to the right.

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select

"Macro", then press the Joystick.

6. To activate the Macro function, move the Joystick

(▲ / ▼) up or down to select "On", then press the Joystick.

If you do not want to use the Macro function,

•

set the "Macro" menu to "Off".

7. To exit, press the MENU button.

Tele Macro ( ) indicator is displayed.

•

When recording in Tele Macro mode, the focus speed may be slow. When you operate the zoom function in the Tele Macro mode, the recording subject may be out of focus. Use a tripod (not supplied) to prevent hand shake in the Tele Macro mode. Avoid shadows when recording in the Tele Macro mode. As the distance to the subject decreases, focussing area narrows. When you can not achieve proper focus, use the Joystick (W/T) or Zoom lever.

(VP-D385( i ) only)

進階錄製

使用望遠微距(

MACRO

望遠微距功能可在

•

➥

望遠微距模式下的有效焦距是 50 公分（19.7 英吋）

•

至 100 公分（39.4 英吋）。

將選擇開關設定為

1.

VP-D385( i ))

按下

2.

按下

3.

•

向上或向下移動

4.

"Camera" Joystick

向上或向下移動

5.

"Macro"

若要啟動

6. (▲ /

•

要結束、可按下

7.

•

)

和

第 18 頁

Camera

CARD 或 TAPE

按鈕以設定

MODE

按鈕。

MENU

將會顯示選單。

、然後按下

()

、然後按下

Macro

▼

以選擇

)

若您不想使用微距功能、可將定為

。

"Off"

望遠

Macro

當在望遠

•

速度可能緩慢。當您在望遠微距模式下操作縮放功能時、錄

•

製主體可能失焦。在望遠

•

以避免手震動。在望遠

•

當與主體的距離縮短時、對焦區域會變窄。

•

當您無法取得正確對焦時、請使用

•

或

(W/T)

Camera

Joystick

(▲ /

Joystick

(▲ /

Joystick

功能、可向上或向下移動

、然後按下

"On"

按鈕。

MENU

( ) 指示器會顯示。

模式中進行錄製時、對焦

Macro

模式中使用三腳架（未提供）

Macro

模式中進行錄製時避免陰影。

Macro

杆。

Zoom

模式下操作

M.Cam

。（僅適用於

( ).

▼

以選擇

)

或向右移動

▼

以選擇

)

。

Joystick

"Macro"

Joystick

。

選單設

Joystick

臺灣 _55

55_ English

SETTING THE DIGITAL IMAGE STABILIZER (DIS)

C.Nite 1/30

16BIt

S

10Sec

W T

No Tape !

12:00 1.JAN.2008

29

1/50

M

60min

0:00:10

SP

16:9 Wide

STBY

Move Select Exi t

White Balance Visual Effect 16:9 Wide Macro DIS

Camera Mode

MENU

Camera

Program AE

Off

✔ On

Move Select Exi t

White Balance Visual Effect 16:9 Wide Macro DIS

Camera Mode

MENU

Camera

Program AE

�

Auto

� Auto � Off � On

�

Off

�

Off

BA

TT .

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

The DIS function works only in Camera mode.

•

➥

page 18

DIS (Digital Image Stabilizer) is a function that

•

compensates for any shaking or hand movement while holding the camcorder (within reasonable limits). It provides more stable pictures when:

•

- Recording with the zoom

- Recording a small object close-up

- Recording and walking at the same time

- Recording through the window of a vehicle

1. Set the Select switch to TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only).

2. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ).

3. Press the MENU button.

The menu list will appear.

•

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Camera", then press the Joystick or move the Joystick () to the right.

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "DIS", then press the Joystick.

6. To activate the DIS function, move the Joystick (▲ / ▼)

up or down to select "On", then press the Joystick.

If you do not want to use the DIS function, set the

•

"DIS" menu to "Off".

7. To exit, press the MENU button.

DIS ( ) indicator is displayed.

•

EASY.Q mode automatically sets the "DIS" to "On". You cannot set the following functions in the DIS mode. : "Mosaic", "Mirror", "Emboss2",

"Pastel1","Pastel2", "C.Nite", "Digital Zoom"

Setting the DIS function in 16:9 Wide mode may produce lower quality than in normal mode. When you press the PHOTO button while the DIS function is enabled, the DIS will be released shortly and resume automatically after recording a photo image on a tape. It is recommended that you deactivate the DIS function when using a tripod. If you use the DIS function, the picture quality may deteriorate.

設定數位影像防手震功能(

DIS

•

（數位影像防手震功能）是補償手握攝錄放影機時

DIS

•

所產生的任何震動或手部動作的功能（在合理範圍內）。

(VP-D385( i ) only)

它在以下情況可提供更穩定的畫面：

•

- 使用縮放錄製

- 錄製小型物體特寫

- 一邊走動一邊進行錄製

- 透過車窗進行錄製

將選擇開關設定為

1.

按下

2.

按下

3.

將會顯示選單。

•

向上或向下移動

4.

然後按下向上或向下移動

5.

後按下

若要啟動

6. (▲ /

若您不想使用

•

為

要結束、可按下

7.

DIS

•

DIS

)

功能僅可在

按鈕以設定

MODE

按鈕。

MENU

Joystick

DIS

▼

以選擇

)

。

"Off"

( ) 指示器會顯示。

EASY.Q

•

您不能在

•

:

"Mosaic"、"Mirror"、"Emboss2" "Pastel1"、"Pastel2"、"C.Nite"、"Digital Zoom"

在 16:9 寬螢幕模式下設定

•

能會低於正常模式下的品質。當您在啟用

•

按鈕時、的相片影像錄製完成後自動恢復。建議您在使用三腳架時關閉

•

若您使用

•

模式下操作。➥第 18 頁

Camera

。（僅適用於

TAPE

Joystick

或向右移動

Joystick

。

功能、可向上或向下移動

"On"

DIS

MENU

模式會自動將

模式中設定以下功能。

DIS

Camera

(▲ /

、然後按下

功能、可將

按鈕。

"DIS"

( )

▼

以選擇

)

Joystick

▼

以選擇

)

Joystick

"DIS"

設定為

DIS

功能的情況下按下

DIS

將被短暫解除、並在錄影帶上

DIS

功能、畫面品質可能下降。

DIS

VP-D385( i ))

。

Joystick

"On"

功能、其品質可

功能。

"Camera"

。

()

"DIS"

。

選單設定

。

、

PHOTO

、

、然



56_ English

臺灣 _56

advanced recording

C.Nite 1/30

16BIt

S

10Sec

W T

No Tape !

12:00 1.JAN.2008

29

1/50

M

60min

0:00:10

SP

16:9 Wide

STBY

Move Select Exi t

Digital Zoom C.Nite Light

Camera Mode

MENU

BLC

Off

✔ On

Camera

Move Select Exi t

White Balance Visual Effect 16:9 Wide Macro DIS

Camera Mode

MENU

Camera

Program AE

�

Auto

� Auto � Off � On

�

Off

�

Off

USING BACK LIGHT COMPENSATION MODE (BLC)

BLC works in both Camera and M.Cam

•

modes. ➥page 18 Back lighting exists when the subject is darker

•

than the background:

- The subject is in front of a window.

- The person to be recorded is wearing white or shiny clothes and is placed against a bright background; the person’s face is too dark to distinguish his/her features.

- The subject is outdoors and the background is overcast.

- The light sources are too bright.

- The subject is against a snowy background.

1. Set the Select switch to CARD or TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only).

2. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ).

3. Press the MENU button.

The menu list will appear.

•

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Camera", then press the Joystick or move the Joystick () to the right.

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "BLC", then press the Joystick.

6. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "On", then press the Joystick.

If you do not want to use the BLC function,

•

set the "BLC" menu to "Off".

7. To exit, press the MENU button.

BLC ( ) indicator will be displayed.

•

This function will be set to "Off" in the EASY Q mode.

進階錄製

使用背光補償模式(

BLC

•

➥

背光情形在主體比背景暗時發生：

•

- 主體位於窗前。

- 將被錄製的人物穿著白色或亮色服飾、並處

- 主體在戶外、而背景陰暗。

- 光源太亮。

- 主體處於雪景中。

將選擇開關設定為

1.

（僅適用於

按下

2.

按下

3.

將會顯示選單清單。

•

向上或向下移動

4.

"Camera" Joystick

向上或向下移動

5.

然後按下

向上或向下移動

6.

然後按下

若您不想使用

•

為

要結束、可按下

7.

BLC

•

BLC

)

可在

第 18 頁

Camera

和

M.Cam

模式下操作。

於明亮的背景中、該人物的臉龐將顯得太暗而無法辨別其五官。

或

TAPE

。

CARD

VP-D385( i ))

按鈕以設定

MODE

按鈕。

MENU

Joystick

、然後按下

()

Joystick

。

"Off"

( ) 指示器將會顯示。

在

EASY Q

Joystick

。

Joystick

。

Joystick

。

功能、可將

BLC

MENU

模式下、此功能將被設定為

Camera

(▲ /

按鈕。

( ).

▼

以選擇

)

或向右移動

▼

以選擇

)

▼

以選擇

)

"BLC"

"On"

選單設定

"Off"

、

。

臺灣 _57

57_ English

ZOOMING IN AND OUT WITH DIGITAL ZOOM

16:9 Wide

C.Nite 1/30

16BIt

S

10Sec

No Tape !

12:00 1.JAN.2008

29

1/50

M

60min

0:00:10

SP

STBY

W T

16:9 Wide

Move Select Exi t

Digital Zoom C.Nite Light

Camera Mode

MENU

BLC

Camera

Off 100x

✔ 200x

400x 1200x

BA

TT .

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

Move Select Exi t

White Balance Visual Effect 16:9 Wide Macro DIS

Camera Mode

MENU

Camera

Program AE

�

Auto

� Auto � Off � On

�

Off

�

Off

(DIGITAL ZOOM)

Maximum Digital Zoom works only in Camera mode. ➥page 18

•

You can select the maximum zoom level in case you want to zoom to a level

•

greater than 34x (the default setting) during recording. Up to 34x zoom is performed optically, and after that, up to 1200x zoom is performed digitally. The picture quality may deteriorate depending on how

•

much you digitally zoom in on the subject.

Selecting the Digital Zoom

1. Set the Select switch to TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only).

2.

Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ).

3. Press the MENU button.

The menu list will appear.

•

4.

Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Camera", then press the Joystick or move the Joystick () to the right.

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Digital Zoom", then press the Joystick.

6. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select the desired

zoom value "Off", "100x", "200x", "400x" or "1200x", then press the Joystick.

"Off" : Only optical zoom is available up to 34x.

•

7. To exit, press the MENU button.

Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down, or move the

•

Zoom lever to use the digital zoom. The digital zoom indicator appears.

•

Maximum digital zooming may result in lower

•

picture quality. You cannot set the Digital Zoom mode in the

•

following modes. Please release these functions

 rst to set the Digital Zoom mode: "EASY.Q", "Mosaic", "Mirror", "Emboss2", "Pastel1", "Pastel2", "DIS"

The Digital Zoom mode does not work as

•

following situations:

- Tape Photo Recording (During recording a photo image on a tape)

- While "EASY.Q", "Mosaic", "Mirror", "Emboss2", "Pastel1", "Pastel2" or "DIS" mode is in use.

When you set the DIS mode while Digital Zoom

•

mode is in use, Digital Zoom mode will be released. You cannot set the C.Nite mode while the

•

Digital Zoom mode in use.

(VP-D385( i ) only)

使用數位縮放來放大和縮小(

最大程度的

•

如果您想在錄製時放大至高於 34 倍（預設設定）的級別、可選擇最大縮放

•

Digital Zoom

僅可在

桿。可透過光學方式執行高達 34x 的縮放、並透過數位方式

DIGITAL ZOOM

模式下操作。 ➥第 18 頁

Camera

執行高達 1200 倍的縮放。

畫面品質可能因為您對主體的數位放大程度而降低。

•

Digital Zoom

選擇

將選擇開關設定為

1.

按下

2.

按下

3.

•

向上或向下移動

4.

然後按下

向上或向下移動

5.

Zoom"

向上或向下移動

6.

值後按下

•

要結束、可按下

7.

•

按鈕以設定

MODE

按鈕。

MENU

將會顯示選單清單。

Joystick

、然後按下

"Off"、"100x"、"200x"、"400x"或"1200x"

Joystick

: 只有光學縮放可高達 34x。

"Off"

向上或向下移動使用數位縮放。將會出現數位縮放指示器。

最大程度的數位縮放可能導致較低的畫面品質。

•

您不能在以下模式中設定

•

首先解除這些功能以設定數位縮放模式：

Q"、"Mosaic"、"Mirror"、"Emboss2" "Pastel1"、"Pastel2"、"DIS"

數位縮放模式在以下情況下不會操作：

•

-

膠片照片錄製（在錄影帶上錄製相片影像時）

- 使用

"Emboss2"、"Pastel1"、"Pastel2"或"DIS"

模式時。

在使用

•

會解除在使用

•

模式。

。（僅適用於

TAPE

Joystick

或向右移動

Joystick

Camera

( ).

▼

以選擇

(▲ /

)

Joystick

▼

以選擇

(▲ /

)

。

▼

以選擇所需的縮放

(▲ /

)

VP-D385( i ))

"Camera"

()

"Digital

。

按鈕。

MENU

(▲ / ▼) 或移動縮放杆以

Joystick

Digital Zoom

模式。請

"EASY.Q"、"Mosaic"、"Mirror"

Digital Zoom Digital Zoom Digital Zoom

模式時設定模式。模式時、不能設定

DIS

模式、將

)

.

"EASY.

、

C.Nite

、

、然

、

58_ English

臺灣 _58

advanced recording

W T

16:9 Wide

16BIt

S

10Sec

No Tape !

12:00 1.JAN.2008

29

1/50

M

60min

0:00:10

SP

STBY

C.Nite 1/25

16:9 Wide

Move Select Exi t

Digital Zoom C.Nite Light

Camera Mode

MENU

BLC

Camera

Off

✔ 1/25

1/13

BA

TT .

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

Move Select Exi t

White Balance Visual Effect 16:9 Wide Macro DIS

Camera Mode

MENU

Camera

Program AE

�

Auto

� Auto � Off � On

�

Off

�

Off

USING THE COLOUR NITE (C.NITE)

C.Nite function works only in Camera mode. ➥page 18

•

You can take a shot of an object in slow motion by

•

controlling the shutter speed, or a brighter image in dark places without compromising colours.

1. Set the Select switch (VP-D385( i ) only).

2. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ).

3. Press the MENU button.

The menu list will appear.

•

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Camera", then press the Joystick or move the Joystick () to the right.

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "C.Nite", then press the Joystick.

6. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select

the C.Nite type, then press the Joystick.

C.Nite type: "Off", "1/25", "1/13".

•

7. To exit, press the MENU button.

The indicator of the selected mode is displayed.

•

When the "Off" mode is selected, no indicator is

•

displayed.

•

to TAPE

.

When using the C.Nite, the image takes on a slow motion like effect. When using the C.Nite, the focus adjusts slowly and white dots may appear on the screen. This is not a defect. The C.Nite function does not work as following situations:

- When DIS or EASY.Q is set. While using the C.Nite function, you can not use the following functions:

- "Program AE", "Mosaic", "Mirror",

"Emboss2", "Pastel1", "Pastel2", "BLC", "Digital Zoom", "Shutter", "Exposure"

- Tape Photo Recording If DIS is set, C.Nite mode will be released.

(VP-D385( i ) only)

進階錄製

使用彩色夜景(

C.NITE

C.Nite

•

透過控制快門速度或使暗地方的影像變亮、您可以

•

用慢動作的方式拍攝物體、並且不會降低色彩。將選擇開關設定為

1.

按下

2.

按下

3.

•

向上或向下移動

4.

"Camera" Joystick

向上或向下移動

5.

"C.Nite"

向上或向下移動

6.

然後按下

•

要結束、可按下

7.

•

)

功能僅在

按鈕以設定

MODE

按鈕。

MENU

將會顯示選單清單。

、然後按下

()

、然後按下

Joystick

類型：

C.Nite

選定模式的指示器將會顯示。當選擇了

"Off"

器。

在使用

•

類似慢動作的效果。在使用

•

慢、同時可能有白點出現在螢幕上、這不是故障所造成。

C.Nite

•

- 當設定為當使用

•

能：

-

"Program AE", "Mosaic", "Mirror", "Emboss2", "BLC", "Digital Zoom", "Shutter", "Exposure"

-

膠片照片錄製

如果設定了

•

模式下操作。 ➥第 18 頁

Camera

( ).

▼

以選擇

)

或向右移動

▼

以選擇

)

。

▼

以選擇

)

VP-D385( i ))

.

TAPE

Joystick

。

。（僅適用於

Camera

(▲/

(▲ /

(▲ /

"OFF"、"1/25"、"1/13"

按鈕。

MENU

模式時、將不會顯示任何指示

功能時、所錄製的影像將具有

C.Nite

功能時、對焦調整將變得緩

C.Nite

功能在以下情況下不會操作：

或

DIS

功能時、您無法使用以下功

C.Nite

"Pastel1",

、將會釋放

DIS

EASY.Q

時。

"Pastel2",

C.Nite

、

C.Nite

。

模式。

臺灣 _59

59_ English

USING THE LIGHT (LIGHT)

C.Nite 1/30

W T

16:9 Wide

16BIt

S

10Sec

No Tape !

12:00 1.JAN.2008

29

1/50

M

60min

0:00:10

SP

STBY

16:9 Wide

Move Select Exi t

Digital Zoom C.Nite Light

Camera Mode

MENU

BLC

Camera

✔

Off

On

BA

TT .

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

Move Select Exi t

White Balance Visual Effect 16:9 Wide Macro DIS

Camera Mode

MENU

Camera

Program AE

�

Auto

� Auto � Off � On

�

Off

�

Off

(VP-D382( i )/D382H/D384/D385( i ) ONLY)

The Light function works only in Camera and M.Cam

•

mode. The Light function enables you to record a subject

•

in a dark place without compromising colours. For example, you can satisfactorily record the environment of nocturnal animals for observation when you use this function.

1.

Set the Select switch to CARD or TAPE (VP-D385( i ) only).

2. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ).

3. Press the MENU button.

•

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Camera", then press the Joystick or move the Joystick () to the right.

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Light", then press the Joystick.

6. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select

"On", then press the Joystick.

To cancel the Light function, set the "Light"

•

menu to "Off".

7. To exit, press the MENU button.

Light ( ) indicator will be displayed.

•

WARNING

➥page 18

The menu list will appear.

The light can become extremely hot.

•

Do not touch it while in operation or soon

•

after turning it off, otherwise serious injury may occur. Do not place the camcorder into the

•

carrying case immediately after using the light, since it remains extremely hot for some time.

Do not use near  ammable or explosive

•

materials.

The range of the light is limited. (up to 2m (6.6ft))

LIGHT

使用燈(

（僅適用於

(VP-D385( i ) only)

)

VP-D382( i )/

燈光功能可在

•

➥

第 18 頁

燈光功能可讓您錄製黑暗中的主體、並且不會降低

•

色彩。例如、當您使用此功能時、您可以滿意地錄

D382H/

Camera

D384/D385( i ))

和

模式下操作。

M.Cam

製夜間所看到的夜行動物。

將選擇開關設定為

1.

.

（僅適用於按下

2.

按下

3.

•

向上或向下移動

4.

"Camera" Joystick

向上或向下移動

5.

然後按下

向上或向下移動

6.

然後按下

•

要結束、可按下

7.

•

警告

VP-D385(i))

按鈕以設定

MODE

按鈕。

MENU

將會顯示選單清單。

、然後按下

(



)

Joystick

若要取消燈光功能、可將

。

"Off"

( ) 指示器將會顯示。

Light

燈光將會過熱。

•

切勿在操作時或熄滅後馬上觸摸它、否則可

•

能導致嚴重受傷。請勿在使用燈光後立刻將攝錄放影機放入攜

•

帶套中、因為它在此時仍舊過熱。切勿靠近易燃性或爆炸性材料。

•

CARD

Joystick

。

Joystick

。

MENU

或

TAPE

Camera

(▲ /

Joystick

(▲ /

"Light"

按鈕。

。

( ).

▼

以選擇

)

或向右移動

▼

以選擇

)

▼

以選擇

)

選單設定為

"Light"

"On"

、

燈光功能的範圍相當有限。

（最遠 2 米（6.6 英尺））

60_ English

臺灣 _60

advanced recording

M O

D

E

A

V

D

V

P

O W

E R

C H

G

V O L

PHOTO

No Tape !

W T

C.Nite 1/30

12:00 1.JAN.2008

16:9 Wide

10Sec

16BIt

S

29

1/50

M

60min

3 SEC

SP

REC

RECORDING A PHOTO IMAGE ON A TAPE -TAPE PHOTO RECORDING

Tape photo recording works only in Camera mode.

•

➥

page 18

You can record a photo image on a tape. The photo

•

image is recorded on a tape for about 6~7 second. This function is useful when you want to record an image such as a photograph on a tape.

1. Set the Select switch to TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only).

2. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ).

3. Press the PHOTO button.

" REC " is displayed on the LCD screen, the

•

photo image is recorded for about 6~7 seconds.

4. After the photo image has been recorded, the

camcorder returns to its previous mode.

Tape Photo Recording is recorded for about six

•

or seven seconds, and your camcorder returns to the standby mode. During the seven seconds, you cannot record another photo image. During the Tape Photo Recording, do not shake

•

your camcorder. Mosaic-pattern noise may appear on the image. During the Tape Photo Recording, you can not

•

set the following functions:

- "Visual Effect", "DIS" , "Digital Zoom", "C.Nite" (After tape photo recording, most functions return to the previous mode.)

Tape Photo Recording does not work as

•

following situations:

- While recording movie images

- When "C.Nite" is set.

Your camcorder also can record photo images

•

on a memory card. ➥page 78 Press PHOTO button on the remote control.

•

Pressing the PHOTO button on the remote control records the tape photo image with automatic focussing. (VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ) only)

進階錄製

在雙面錄影帶相片錄製上錄製相片影像

<VP-D382(i)/D382H/D385(i) only>

錄影帶相片錄製功能僅可在

•

第 18 頁

➥

您可在錄影帶上錄製相片影像。在錄影帶上錄製相

•

片影像 6~7 秒。此功能在您想在錄影帶上錄製相片影像時有用。

將選擇開關設定為

1.

按下

2.

按

3.

•

在相片影像被錄製後、攝錄放影機將返回之前

4.

模式。

按鈕以設定

MODE

（相片）按鈕。

PHOTO

在

螢幕上會顯示

LCD

秒相片影像。

錄影帶相片錄製會進行 6 至 7 秒的錄製、而

•

且您的攝錄放影機會返回到待機模式。

TAPE

。（僅適用於

Camera

( ).

" REC "

模式下操作。

VP-D385( i ))

會錄製 6~7

在 7 秒時間內、您無法錄製其他相片影像。在錄影帶相片錄製期間、切勿搖動攝錄放影

•

機。馬賽克狀圖案噪音可能會出現在影像上。在錄影帶相片錄製期間、您無法設定以下功

•

能：

-

"Visual Effect", "DIS" , "Digital Zoom",

（在錄影帶相片錄製完畢後、大

"C.Nite"

多數功能均會返回到上一個模式。）

錄影帶相片錄製在以下情況下不會操作：

•

- 在錄製影片影像時

- 在設定為您的攝錄放影機還可以在記憶卡上錄製相片

•

影像。 ➥第 76 頁按下遙控器上的

•

上的

PHOTO

帶相片影像（僅適用於

D385( i ))

時。

"C.Nite"

按鈕。按下遙控器

PHOTO

按鈕可通過自動對焦錄製錄影

VP-D382( i )/D382H/

臺灣 _6161_ English

SEARCHING FOR A PHOTO IMAGE ON A TAPE

16Bit

W T

S

10Sec

No Tape !

29

1/50

M

57min

0:02:59:24

SP

Photo Search

MENU

Exit

Search

16Bit

W T

S

10Sec

No Tape !

29

1/50

M

57min

0:03:30:23

SP

Photo Search

MENU

Exit

Search

Photo searching...

Move Select Exi t

Photo Copy Audio Select Audio Effect

Player Mode

MENU

Photo Search

Tape

(PHOTO SEARCH)

The photo search works only in Player mode.

•

➥

page 18

1. Set the Select switch to TAPE. (

2. Press the MODE button to set Player ( ).

3. Press the MENU button.

The menu list will appear.

•

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Tape", then press the Joystick or move the Joystick () to the right.

5.

Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Photo Search", then press the Joystick

•

6. Move the Joystick ( tape photo image.

The photo search process appears while you are

•

searching. After completing the search, the camcorder

•

displays the tape photo image. When there are no photo images recorded on the

•

tape, it will be fully rewound or forwarded.

7.

To stop the photo search, move down the Joystick (▼) or press the MENU button.

•

VP-D385( i )

/ will icker on the LCD screen.

The remote control will help you search for a desired photo image. (VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ) only)

- In STOP mode, press the SEARCH button on the remote control. When the indictor blinks / on the screen, use the (rewind) or

desired image.

You can nd a photo image of your choice and copy it to the memory card. (VP-D385( i )) only) ➥page 88

/

) left or right to search the





PHOTO

(fast forward) button to search for a

only)

.

在錄影帶上搜尋相片影像 (PHOTO SEARCH)

相片搜尋功能僅在

•

<VP-D382(i)/D382H/D385(i) only>

模式下操作。➥第 18 頁

Player

將

開關設定為

1.

選擇

按下

2.

MODE

按下

3.

MENU

將會顯示選單清單。

•

向上或向下移動

4.

然後按下

向上或向下移動

5. Search"

/

•

向左或向右移動

6.

片影像。

當您在進行搜尋時、相片搜尋過程會顯示。

•

完成搜尋後、攝錄放影機會顯示錄影帶相片影像。

•

當錄影帶上沒有錄製任何相片影像時、它將被完

•

全回轉或快進。

若要停止相片搜尋、可向下移動

7.

下

MENU

遙控器將會幫助您搜尋所需的相片影像。

•

（僅適用於

- 在 STOP 模式下、請按下遙控器上的

SEARCH

TAPE

按鈕以設定

按鈕。

Joystick

或向右移動

Joystick

、然後按下

Joystick

將會在 LCD 螢幕上閃爍。

Joystick (

按鈕。

VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ))

按鈕。當螢幕上的指示器閃爍

/

時、請使用 ( 回轉 ) 或 ( 快進 )

。（僅適用於 VP-D385( i ))

( )。

Player

( ▲ / ▼ ) 以選擇

Joystick

( ▲ / ▼ ) 以選擇

。

/

以搜尋錄影帶相





)

Joystick

按鈕來搜尋所需的影像。

找到所需的相片影像後、將其複製到記憶卡。

•

（僅適用於

VP-D385( i ))

➥

第 88 頁

"Tape"

()

。

"Photo

( ▼ ) 或按

PHOTO

、

62_ English

臺灣 _62

A

V

D

V

B A

TT .

M

E

N

U

W

T

M

O

D

E

P

O

W

E

R

C

H

G

MOV_0001

12:00 1.JAN.2008

0:00:30:23

60min

SP

[11]

STOP

MIX[1+2]

16BIt

S

AV In

12:00 1.JAN.2008

0:00:30:23

60min

SP

BA

TT .

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

playback

PLAYING BACK A TAPE ON THE LCD SCREEN

The playback function and speaker works only in

•

Player mode. ➥page 18 You can monitor the playback picture on the LCD screen.

•

1. Insert the tape you wish to view. ➥page 34

2.

Set the Select switch to TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only)

3. Press the MODE button to set Player ( ).

4. Open the LCD screen.

Adjust the angle of the LCD screen and set the

•

brightness or colour if necessary. ➥page 31

5.

Press the Joystick, then move the Joystick (/) left or right to rewind or forward the tape to the starting point.

To stop rewinding or forwarding, move down the

•

Joystick (). The camcorder stops automatically after rewinding

•

or forwarding is completed.

6. Press the Joystick to start playback. You can view the picture you recorded on the LCD

•

screen. To stop the play operation, move down the Joystick ().

•

Adjusting the LCD Bright / LCD Colour during Playback

You can adjust the LCD bright/LCD colour during playback.

•

The adjustment method is the same procedure as

•

used in Camera mode. ➥page 31

Adjusting the Volume

When you use the LCD screen for playback, you can

•

hear recorded sound from the built-in speaker.

- Take the following steps to lower the volume or mute the sound while playing a tape on the camcorder.

When sound is heard once the tape is in play, use the

•

Zoom (VOL) lever to adjust the volume.

- A volume level display will appear on the LCD screen.

- Levels may be adjusted from anywhere between "00" to "19".

- If you close the LCD screen while playing, you will not hear sound from the speaker.

When the Audio/Video cable is connected to the

•

camcorder, you cannot hear sound from the built-In speaker and cannot adjust the volume.

(VP-D385( i ) only)

播放

LCD

在

螢幕上播放錄影帶

播放功能和喇叭僅可在

•

您可以在

•

放入您要檢視的錄影帶。 ➥第 34 頁

1.

將選擇開關設定為

2.

按下

3.

打開

4.

•

按下

5.

以將錄影帶回轉或前進至起始點。

•

按下

6.

•

螢幕上監視播放畫面。

LCD

按鈕以設定

MODE

螢幕。

LCD

調整

螢幕的角度、如有必要、設定亮度或色

LCD

彩。 ➥第 31 頁

、然後向左或向左移動

Joystick

以將錄影帶回轉或前進至起始點完成回轉或前進後、攝錄放影機會自動停止。

以開始播放。

Joystick

您可以在

LCD

若要停止播放操作、可向下移動

在播放期間調整

您可以在播放期間調整

•

調整方法和在

•

➥

第 31 頁

Camera

模式下操作。 ➥第 18 頁

Player

。（僅適用於

TAPE

Player

( ).

VP-D385( i ))

Joystick

螢幕上檢視您所錄製的畫面。

Joystick

()

LCD Bright / LCD

LCD bright / LCD

模式中使用的程序相同。

色彩。

調整音量

當您使用

•

所錄製的音效。

-

當您聽到錄影帶播放的音效時、使用縮放(

•

桿來調整音量。

-

- 音量可在

-

當聲訊 / 視訊纜線連接到攝錄放影機時、您將無法從內

•

置喇叭聽到音效、同時也不能調整音量。

螢幕來播放時、您可以從內置喇叭聽到

LCD

在攝錄放影機上播放錄影帶時採取以下步驟來調低音量或設定靜音。

螢幕上會出現音量顯示。

LCD

"00"到"19"

若您在進行播放時關閉喇叭聽到音效。

之間進行調整。

螢幕、您將不會從

LCD

(/)

()

.

色彩。

)

VOL

臺灣 _63

63_ English

VARIOUS FUNCTIONS WHILE IN PLAYER MODE

MIX[1+2]

16BIt

S

AV In

12:00 1.JAN.2008

0:00:20:23

60min

SP

This function works only in Player mode. ➥page 18

•

The PLAY, PAUSE, STOP, FF and REW buttons are located on the

•

remote control (VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ) only) and all of which you can manipulate with the Joystick (

The F.ADV (Frame advance), X2 and SLOW buttons are located on the

•

remote control only. (VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ) only) To prevent tape and head-drum wear, your camcorder will automatically

•

stop if it is left in pause or slow modes for more than 3 minutes.

Playback/Pause

Press the Joystick during playback.

•

To resume playback, press the Joystick.

•

(Press the (PLAY) or control.)

Picture Search (Forward/Reverse)

Move the Joystick (/) left or right during playback

•

or pause mode. To resume normal playback, press the Joystick. (Press the (REW) / (FF) buttons on the remote control.)

Slow Playback (Forward/Reverse) (VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ) only)

Forward Slow Playback

•

- Press the (SLOW) button on the remote control during playback.

- To resume normal playback, press the (PLAY) button.

Reverse Slow Playback

•

- Press the

- To resume forward slow playback, press the

- To resume normal playback, press the

playback.

button.



❙❙

(-) button during forward slow

///

❙❙

(PAUSE) button on the remote

(PLAY)



) on the camcorder.

❙❙

(+)



<VP-D382(i)/D382H/D385(i) only>

播放機模式中的各項功能

此功能僅可在

•

"PLAY"、"PAUSE"、"STOP"、"FF"和"REW"

•

（僅適用於

影機上的

Joystick

（逐幀播放）、X2 和

F.ADV

•

（僅適用於

為避免錄影帶和磁鼓耗損、您的攝錄放影機會在暫停或慢動作模式

•

中停留超過 3 分鐘後自動停止。

模式下操作。 ➥第 18 頁

Player

VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ))

(

///

VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ))

)

進行操作。

按鈕僅可在遙控器上找到。

SLOW

按鈕都在遙控器上、

、而且這些均可通過攝錄放

。

播放 / 暫停

在播放時按下

•

要繼續播放、請按

•

( 按下遙控器上的

Joystick

(PLAY)



。

或 ❙❙

(PAUSE)

畫面搜尋（前進 / 倒退）

在播放暫停模式中、向左或向右移動

•

(/) 若要繼續正常播放、可按下 ( 按下遙控器上的

(REW)

/

慢動作播放（前進 / 倒退）（僅適用於

VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ))

慢動作前進播放

•

- 播放時按遙控器上的

- 若要恢復正常播放、可按下

慢動作倒退播放

•

- 在慢動作前進播放期間按

- 若要恢復慢動作前進播放、請按

- 若要恢復正常播放、可按下

(SLOW)



(-)

❙❙





(PLAY)

Joystick

按鈕。）

(FF)

按鈕。

❙❙



(+

按鈕。）

。

按鈕。

)

按鈕。

64_ English

臺灣 _64

playback

Frame Advance (To play back frame by frame) (VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ) only)

Press the F.ADV button on the remote control while in pause mode.

•

-

Video sequence advances frame by frame each time you press the F.ADV button or

- The F.ADV function works in pause mode only. To resume normal playback, press the (PLAY)

•

button.

- Forward frame advance

Press the F.ADV button or remote control in pause mode.

- Reverse frame advance

Press the change the direction in F.ADV mode.

❙❙



(-) button on the remote control to

X2 Playback (Forward/Reverse) (VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ) only)

Forward X2 Playback

•

- Press the

- To resume normal playback, press the Reverse X2 Playback

•

- Press the

- To resume normal playback, press the

Reverse Playback

To play back in reverse at normal speed, press the

•

the remote control during normal forward playback. Press the (PLAY) button or

•

forward playback.

X2 button on the remote control

during playback.

❙❙

(-) button during forward X2 playback.



(VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ) only)

Mosaic shaped distortion may appear on the screen while

•

in some of the various playback modes. Mosaic shaped distortion or noise may be experienced when you play back tapes recorded in LP which contain various playback functions. Sound will only be heard during normal SP or LP playback.

•

To activate the remote control, set "Remote" to "On". ➥page 25

•

(VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ) only)

❙❙

(+) button.



❙❙

(+) button on the



(PLAY) button.



(PLAY) button.



❙❙

(+) button to return to normal



<VP-D382(i)/D382H/D385(i) only>

❙❙

(-) button on



播放

逐幀播放（按逐幀進行播放）

（僅適用於VP-D382(i)/D382H/D385(i))

在暫停模式中、按遙控器上的

•

- 視訊順序會在您每次按

-

F.ADV

操作。

若要恢復正常播放、可按下

•

-

逐幀前進播放

在暫停模式中、按遙控器上的

❙❙



-

逐幀倒退播放

按遙控器上的式的方向。

X2

播放（前進 / 倒退）（僅適用於

VP-D382(i)/D382H/D385(i))

X2 前進播放

•

- 播放時按遙控器上的

- 若要恢復正常播放、可按下 X2 倒退播放

•

- 在 X2 前進播放期間按

- 若要恢復正常播放、可按下

倒退播放（僅適用於 VP-D382(i)/D382H/D385(i))

若要以正常速度倒退播放、請在正常前進播放時按遙控器上的

•

❙❙

按鈕。

(-)



按

(PLAY)



•

一些播放模式中可能會在螢幕上出現馬賽克狀失真。

•

當您播放以 LP 錄製、具有多項播放功能的錄影帶時、可能會經歷馬賽克狀失真或噪波。只有在正常 SP 或 LP 播放時可聽到音效。

•

若要啟動遙控器、可將

•

➥

❙❙

按鈕或

第 25 頁（僅適用於

(+) 按鈕以返回正常前進播放。



按鈕。

F.ADV

（逐幀播放）功能僅可在暫停模式下

按鈕。

(+)

❙❙

按鈕或

"Remote"

VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ))

按鈕時按逐幀播放。

(+)



(PLAY)



❙❙



按鈕以變更逐幀播放模

(-)

按鈕。

X2

(PLAY)



❙❙



(-)

(PLAY)



設定為

"On"

F.ADV

按鈕。

。

按鈕。



按鈕或

按鈕。

臺灣 _65

65_ English

STOP

16BIt

16:9 Wide

10Sec

S

C.Nite 1/30

No Tape !

12:00 1.JAN.2008

W T

29

1/50

M

60min

0:00:00

SP

AUDIO DUBBING (VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ) ONLY)

This feature enables you to dub your voice through

•

the internal microphone or other audio equipment onto a pre-recorded camcorder tape. The original sound on the tape will not be erased. The Audio Dubbing function works only in Player

•

mode. ➥page 18 You can not dub sound on a pre-recorded tape in

•

LP or 16 bit mode. You can add sound to the original sound on a

•

pre-recorded tape recorded in SP mode 12bit sound.

1. Set the Select switch to TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only).

2. Press the MODE button to set Player ( ).

3. Move the Joystick

time frame of the scene to be dubbed.

4. Press the Joystick to playback, and press it again to pause the scene.

If you want to resume to playback, just press the

•

Joystick again on playback.

5. Press the A.DUB button on the remote control.

Audio dubbing ( ) indicator is displayed.

•

The camcorder is ready for dubbing.

•

6. Press the (PLAY) button (on the remote control) or Joystick to start dubbing.

Press the ■ (STOP) button (on the remote control) or move

•

down the Joystick (▼)

You can not use the Audio Dubbing function while playing a

•

write protected video tape. To utilize an external sound source, use the Audio/Video

•

cable to connect external sound source input. To dub from an external sound source, set "AV In/Out" function to "In". (VP-D381i/D382i/D385i only) ➥ page 68

/

(

) left or right and  nd the





to stop the dubbing.

with

<VP-D382(i)/D382H/D385(i) only>

配音（僅適用於

按下

(PLAY)



6.

按下

•

以停止配音。

您不能在播放具有寫入保護的錄影帶時使用配音功能。

•

要利用外部音源、請使用聲訊 / 視訊線來連接外部音源輸

•

入。要為入外部音源配音、請將

"In"。 (

VP-D382( i )/D382H/D385( i ))

此功能可讓您透過內建麥克風或其他聲音設備為

•

預先錄製的攝錄放影機錄影帶配音。錄影帶上的原始音效將不會被刪除。配音功能僅可在

•

您不能為以 LP 或

•

行配音。您可以為預先錄製的錄影帶上以 SP 模式錄製

•

的

12bit

將選擇開關設定為

1.

按下

MODE

2.

向左或向右移動

3.

場景時間幀。

按下

Joystick

4.

場景。

如果您要恢復播放、僅需要再次按下

•

即可。

按遙控器上的

5.

Audio dubbing

•

攝錄放影機就緒進行配音。

•

按鈕（遙控器上）或

■

按鈕（遙控器上）或向下移動

(STOP)

僅適用於

Player

16 bit

原始音效新增音效。

TAPE

按鈕以設定

Joystick

以進行播放、然後再次按下以暫停

按鈕。

A.DUB

( ) 指示器會顯示。

Joystick

VP-D381i/D382i/D385i ) ➥ 第 68

"AV In/Out"

模式下操作。➥第 18 頁模式預先錄製的錄影帶進

。（僅適用於

Player

(/)

VP-D385( i ))

( ).

然後查找要配音的

Joystick

以開始配音。

Joystick

功能設定為

(

▼

頁

)

66_ English

臺灣 _66

playback

Move Select Exi t

Photo Copy Audio Select Audio Effect

Player Mode

MENU

Photo Search

Tape

� Sound[1] � Off

Move Select Exi t

Photo Copy Audio Select Audio Effect

Player Mode

MENU

Photo Search

Tape

Sound[1] Sound[2]

✔ MIX[1+2]

STBY

16BIt

S

AV In

12:00 1.JAN.2008

0:00:20:23

60min

SP

MIX[1+2]

BA

TT .

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

DUBBED AUDIO PLAYBACK (AUDIO SELECT)

The dubbed Audio playback function works only in

•

Player mode. ➥page 18

1. Set the Select switch to TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only).

2. Press the MODE button to set Player ( ).

3. Insert the dubbed tape and press the MENU

button.

The menu list will appear.

•

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select

"Tape", then press the Joystick or move the Joystick () to the right.

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select

"Audio Select", then press the Joystick.

6. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select the

audio playback channel, then press the Joystick.

"Sound[1]" : Plays the original sound.

•

"Sound[2]" : Plays the dubbed sound.

•

"MIX[1+2]" : Plays back sound 1 and 2

•

7. To exit, press the MENU button.

8. Press the Joystick to play back the dubbed tape.

To stop the dubbed audio playback, move down

•

the Joystick (▼).

When you play back added sound "Sound[2]" or "MIX[1+2]", you may experience a loss of sound quality.

equally mixed.

(VP-D385( i ) only)

播放

配音後的聲訊播放(

dubbed Audio

•

➥

第 18 頁

將選擇開關設定為

1.

按下

2.

放入配音後的錄影帶、並按

3.

將會顯示選單清單。

•

向上或向下移動

4.

然後按下

向上或向下移動

5.

Select"

向上或向下移動

6.

頻道、然後按下

"Sound[1]"

•

"Sound[2]"

•

"MIX[1+2]"

•

要結束、可按下

7.

按下

8.

若要停止配音後的聲訊播放、可向下移動

•

Joystick (▼)

AUDIO SELECT

播放功能僅可在

TAPE

按鈕以設定

MODE

Joystick

或向右移動

Joystick

、然後按下

Joystick

當您在播放新增的音效

"MIX[1+2]"

Joystick

: 播放原始音效。

: 播放配音。

: 播放混合的音效 1 及 2。

按鈕。

MENU

以播放配音後的錄影帶。

。

時、音效品質可能會有遺失。

,

)

Player

。（僅適用於

( ).

Player

按鈕。

MENU

▼

以選擇

(▲ /

)

Joystick

▼

以選擇

(▲ /

)

。

▼

以選擇聲訊播放

(▲ /

)

。

"Sound[2]"

模式下操作。

VP-D385( i ))

"Tape"

() .

"Audio

或



、

臺灣 _67

67_ English

AUDIO EFFECT

Move Select Exi t

Photo Copy Audio Select Audio Effect

Player Mode

MENU

Photo Search

Tape

Off

✔

Voice Music Wide Echo

MIX[1+2]

16BIt

S

AV In

12:00 1.JAN.2008

0:00:20:23

60min

SP

STOP

VV

Move Select Exi t

Photo Copy Audio Select Audio Effect

Player Mode

MENU

Photo Search

Tape

� Sound[1] � Off

Audio effect function works only in Player mode.

•

➥

page 18

Audio effect provides various playback effects to

•

audio signals stored on a tape.

1. Set the Select switch to TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only)

2. Press the MODE button to set Player ( ).

3. Insert the recorded tape and press the MENU

button.

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Tape", then press the Joystick or move the Joystick () to the right.

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Audio Effect", then press the Joystick.

6. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select the audio effect channel, then press the Joystick.

"Off": Disables the function.

•

"Voice": Highlights the human voice.

•

"Music": Highlights the sound by enhancing

•

"Wide": Magni es the stereo effect by

•

"Echo": Gives an echo effect.

•

7. To exit, press the MENU button.

•

the bass and treble.

enhancing the left and right sounds.

We recommended connecting to stereo devices (TV, speakers) for better audio effects. Audio effect function is not available DV connection.

AUDIO EFFECT

Audio effect

•

Audio effect

•

功能僅可在功能可為儲存在錄影帶中的聲訊訊號提供各種播放效果。

將選擇開關設定為

1.

按下

2.

放入錄製的錄影帶並按

3.

向上或向下移動

4.

然後按下

向上或向下移動

5.

Effect"

向上或向下移動

6.

頻道、然後按下

•

要結束、可按下

7.

為獲取更好的聲訊效果、我們建議連接到體聲裝置（電視機、

•

揚聲器）。採用 DV 連線時音效功能不可用。

•

模式下操作。 ➥第 18 頁

Player

。（僅適用於

TAPE

按鈕以設定

MODE

Player

MENU

Joystick

(▲ /

或向右移動

Joystick

、然後按下

: 停用功能。

"Off"

: 區分出人的聲音。

"Voice"

:

透過增強低音與高音頻率來區分聲音。

"Music"

: 此功能可透過增強左右音效來放大立

"Wide"

體聲效果。

: 提供回聲音效。

"Echo"

Joystick

Joystick Joystick

MENU

(▲ /

。

按鈕。

( ).

按鈕。

▼

以選擇

)

Joystick

▼

以選擇

)

。

▼

以選擇聲訊效果

)

VP-D385( i ))

"Tape"

.

()

"Audio

、

68_ English

臺灣 _68

connection

Move Select Exi t

Audio Mode WindCut Plus AV In/Out

Player Mode

MENU

Rec Mode

Record

� SP

�

12Bit

�

Off

�

Out

Move Select Exi t

Audio Mode

WindCut Plus

AV In/Out

Player Mode

MENU

Rec Mode

Record

Out

✔

In

W T

S

1/50

M

SP

STOP

AV In

SETTING THE AV IN/OUT (AV IN/OUT) (VP-D381i/D382i/D385i ONLY)

AV In/Out function works only in Player mode.

•

➥

page 18

AV In/Out setting enables you to record signals from

•

external sources and display it on LCD screen. Also, you can send your video or image to external devices to record or play back.

1. Set the Select switch to TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only)

2. Press the MODE button to set Player ( ).

3. Press the MENU button.

The menu list will appear.

•

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Record", then press the Joystick or move the Joystick () to the right.

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "AV In/Out", then press the Joystick.

6. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Out" or "In", then press the Joystick.

"Out": Select this when copying or playing back the

•

"In": Select this when recording the contents of an

•

7. To exit, press the MENU button.

When recording images from a VCR, playback

•

must be at normal speed, or a grey image will appear on the camcorder. If "AV In/Out" is set to "In", the windcut plus

•

function is not available.

contents of this camcorder onto the external device.

external device to the camcorder.

連接

設定AVIN/OUT(AVIN/OUT)

（僅適用於VP-D381i/D382i/D385i）

功能僅可在

7.

要結束、可按下

在從

•

影機上將會顯示灰色影像。如果將

•

用。

AV In/Out

•

➥

第

頁

18

AV In/Out

•

螢幕上顯示。同時、您也可以將您的視訊或影

LCD

像傳送到外部裝置以進行錄製或播放。

1.

將選擇開關設定為

2.

MODE

按下

3.

MENU

按下

選單清單將會顯示。

•

4.

向上或向下移動

"Record" Joystick ()

5.

向上或向下移動

"AV In/Out"

6.

向上或向下移動

"In"

、然後按

"Out"

：選擇將此攝錄放影機的內容複製到外部

•

"In"

：選擇將外部裝置的內容複製到攝錄放影

•

MENU

按鈕。

VCR

錄製影像時、必須以正常速度播放、否則、攝錄放

"AV In/Out"

Player

設定可讓您從外部來源錄製訊號、然後在

TAPE

。（僅適用於

按鈕以設定

Player ( )

按鈕。

Joystick (▲ / ▼)

、然後按下

Joystick

。

Joystick (▲ / ▼)

Joystick

、然後按

Joystick (▲ / ▼)

Joystick

。

裝置上或在外部裝置上播放它時、可選擇此按鈕。

機時、可選擇此按鈕。

"In"

設定為

、增強的消除風聲功能將不可

模式中操作。

VP-D385( i ))

。

以選擇

或向右移動

以選擇

。

以選擇

"Out"

或

臺灣 _69

69_ English

TAPE PLAYING BACK ON A TV SCREEN

AV

MODE

DV

POWER

CHG

The playback function works only in Player mode. ➥page 18

•

To play back a tape, the television must be PAL compatible.

•

➥

page 102

We recommend that you use the AC power adapter as the power

•

source for the camcorder.

Connecting to a TV that has Audio/Video Input Jacks

1. Connect the camcorder to

your TV with the Audio/Video cable.

The yellow jack: Video

•

The white jack: Audio(L)-

•

The red jack: Audio(R)

•

If you connect to a mono

•

TV, connect the yellow jack (Video) to the video input of the TV and the white jack audio input of the TV.

2. Set the Select switch to TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only)

3.

Press the MODE button to set Player ( ).

4. Turn on the TV and set the TV/VIDEO selector on the TV to Video.

Refer to the TV user’s manual.

•

5. Play the tape. ➥page 70

If you connect the cable to the AV jack, you will not hear sound from the camcorder's speaker.

mono

(Audio L) to the

TV

Signal flow

在電視螢幕上播放的錄影帶

播放功能僅可在

•

要播放錄影帶、該電視機必須為

•

我們建議您使用交流電源適配器作為攝錄放影機的電源。

•

模式下操作。 ➥第 18 頁

Player

相容型。➥第 102 頁

PAL

連接到具有聲訊 / 視訊輸入插孔的電視機

使用聲訊 / 視訊纜線將攝錄放影機

TAPE

1.

連接到電視機。

•

（僅適用於

Player

TV/VIDEO

黃色插孔：視訊白色插孔：

紅色插孔：若您連接了單聲道電視機、

請將黃色插孔（視訊）連接到電視機的視訊輸入並將白色插孔（聲訊左）連接到電視機的聲訊輸入。

VP-D385( i ))

( )。

（電視機 / 視訊）選擇

Audio(L)

- 單聲道

Audio(R)

（聲訊（左））

（聲訊（右））

Camcorder

AV Jack

Audio/Video Cable

將選擇開關設定為

2.

按下

3.

打開電視機、然後將電視機上的

4.

器設定為

•

播放錄影帶。 ➥第 70 頁

5.

按鈕以設定

MODE

（視訊）。

Video

請參閱電視機的使用者手冊。

若您將該線連接到 AV 插孔、您將不會聽到攝錄放影機的喇叭所發出的音效。

70_ English

臺灣 _70

connection

AV

MODE

DV

POWER

CHG

Connecting to a TV that has no Audio/Video Input Jacks

You can connect your camcorder to a TV through a VCR.

•

1. Connect the camcorder to your VCR with the Audio/Video cable. The yellow jack: Video

•

The white jack: Audio(L) - mono

•

The red jack: Audio(R)

•

2. Connect a TV to the VCR.

3. Set the Select switch to TAPE.

(VP-D385( i ) only).

4. Press the MODE button to set

Player ( ).

5. Turn on both the TV and VCR.

Set the input selector on the

•

VCR to line. Select the channel reserved

•

for your VCR on the TV set.

6. Play the tape.

Antenna

Playback the tape

1. Connect a power source.

2. Insert the tape you wish to play back.

3. Set the Select switch to TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only).

4. Press the MODE button to set Player ( ).

5. Move the Joystick (/) left or right,  nd the  rst position you

wish to play back.

6. Press the Joystick. The images you recorded will appear on the TV after a few

•

seconds. If a tape reaches its end while being played back, the tape will

•

rewind automatically.

7. To stop the playback, move down the Joystick (▼).

The playback mode (SP/LP) is selected automatically.

•

If only a mono audio input is available on the TV set, use

•

the audio cable with the white jack (Audio L).

VCR

TV

連接

連接到沒有聲訊 / 視訊輸入插孔的電視機

您可以透過

•

使用聲訊 / 視訊線將攝錄放影機連接到您的

1.

Camcorder

Signal flow

Audio/Video Cable

播放錄影帶

連接電源

1.

放入您要播放的錄影帶。

2.

將選擇開關設定為

3.

按下

MODE

4.

向左或向右移動

5.

按下

Joystick

6.

您所錄製的影像會在數秒後出現在電視機上。

•

若錄影帶在播放時播到帶子結束、錄影帶將自動回轉。

•

若要停止播放、可向下移動

7.

•

將您的攝錄放影機連接到電視機。

VCR

AV Jack

6.

。（僅適用於

TAPE

按鈕以設定

將會自動選擇播放模式 ( 若電視機上只有一個單聲道聲訊輸入可以使用、請將聲訊纜線用於白色插孔（

Joystick

。

Player

(/)

Joystick

Audio L

。

VCR

黃色插孔：視訊

•

白色插孔： Audio(L)（聲訊（左））

•

紅色插孔：Audio(R)（聲訊（右））

•

將電視機連接到

2.

將選擇開關設定為

3.

（僅適用於按下

4.

( ).

打開電視機和

5.

將

•

為「線」。在電視機上選擇為您的

•

所保留的頻道。

播放錄影帶。

( ).

尋找您要播放的首個位置。

SP/LP

（聲訊左））。

- 單聲道

VP-D385( i ))

按鈕以設定

MODE

VCR

上的輸入選擇器設定

VCR

VP-D385( i ))

(

.

▼

)

)。

VCR

TAPE

。

Player

VCR

臺灣 _71

71_ English

COPYING A CAMCORDER TAPE ONTO A VIDEO TAPE

AV

MODE

DV

POWER

CHG

The copying function works only in Player Mode. ➥ page 18

•

Connect your camcorder to a VCR using the AV jack to copy the

•

recording from a camcorder tape onto a VCR tape. Set the "AV In/Out" to "Out" before copying to an external device.

•

(VP-D381i/D382i/D385i only)

➥

page 68

1. Insert the tape you want to copy

in your camcorder.

2. Set the Select switch to TAPE.

(VP-D385( i ) only).

3. Press the MODE button to set

Player ( ).

4. Insert a new video tape in your

VCR.

5. Connect the camcorder to

your VCR with the Audio/Video cable.

Connect the Audio/Video

•

cable to the input jack on your VCR. The yellow jack: Video

•

The white jack: Audio(L)-mono

•

The red jack: Audio(R)

•

6. Press the Record button on your VCR to start recording.

7. Play the tape on your camcorder. Please refer to page 70 to see

how to play a tape.

if you do not want to copy the screen display, set the "TV

•

Display" to "Off" in the menu. ➥ page 33

When Copying is Complete:

Stop recording on your VCR, then move down the Joystick (▼) on your camcorder.

If you operate the camcorder while connected to another

•

device, always connect the camcorder to an AC outlet using the AC power adapter. You can also copy images to other external storage media

•

using this camcorder.

VCR

將攝錄放影機錄影帶複製到視訊錄影帶上

該複製功能僅可在

•

使用 AV 插孔把攝錄放影機連接到

•

帶上的錄影複製到把內容複製到外接式裝置前 / 請將

•

(

VP-D381i/D382i/D385i)

僅適用於

Camcorder

Signal flow

Audio/Video Cable

白色插孔：

•

紅色插孔：

•

按下

6.

在您的攝錄放影機上播放錄影帶。請參閱第 70 頁以查看如何播放錄

7.

影帶。

•

Audio(L) Audio(R)

上的錄製按鈕以開始錄影。

VCR

如果您不想將複製到螢幕顯示器、可在選單中將設定為

"Off"

複製完成後

在

上停止錄製、然後向下移動攝錄放影機上的

VCR

如果在連接至另一裝置時操作攝錄放影機、應始終使用交流

•

電源適配器將攝錄放影機連接到交流插座上。也可使用該攝錄放影機將影像複製到其他外部儲存媒體中。

•

模式下操作。 ➥ 第 18 頁

Player

錄影帶上。

VCR

AV Jack

（聲訊（左））- 單聲道（聲訊（右））

。➥ 第 33 頁

、以將攝錄放影機錄影

VCR

"AV In/Out"

➥

第 68 頁

將您要複製的錄影帶放入攝錄

1.

放影機。

將選擇開關設定為

2.

（僅適用於

按下

3.

( ).

將新錄影帶放入

4.

使用聲訊 / 視訊線將攝錄放影機

5.

連接到您的

•

設定

VP-D385( i ))

按鈕以設定

MODE

VCR

將聲訊 / 視訊線連接到上的輸入插孔。黃色插孔：視訊

Joystick

"Out"

為

。

TAPE

Player

中。

VCR

。

VCR

"TV Display"

。

(

▼

)

72_ English

臺灣 _72

MIX[1+2]

16BIt

S

AV In

12:00 1.JAN.2008

0:00:20:23

60min

SP

MIX[1+2]

16Bit

S

AV In

12:00 1.JAN.2008

0:00:20:23

60min

SP

Voice+

AV

MODE

DV

POWER

CHG

connection

USING THE VOICE+ FUNCTION

The Voice+ function works only in Player mode. ➥ page 18

•

When you want to play back or record a tape-recorded movie on other AV device,

•

you can transfer the voice sound incoming from the internal microphone of your camcorder, instead of the audio signals on a prerecorded tape.

1. Connect the provided Audio/Video

cable to the AV Jack of the camcorder.

2. Connect the other end of the cable

to the VCR/DVD Recorder/TV by matching the colours of the terminals.

3. Set the Select switch to TAPE.

(VP-D385( i ) only).

4. Press the MODE button to set Player

( ).

5. Insert the tape you wish to play back in

this camcorder.

6. Press the Recording start/stop button

on a point where you want during the playback.

Voice+ ( ) indicator is displayed

•

on the screen and "VOICE+" will

 icker on the screen for a while.

Sound incoming from the internal

•

microphone will be transferred to the connected AV device, instead of the pre-recorded sound on the tape.

7. To cancel the function, press the Recording start/stop button again.

Voice+ is available only when the Audio/Video cable

•

is connected. If a different cable (DV or USB cable (VP-D385( i ) only)) is connected, Voice+ function may not operate properly. If you move the Joystick (///) when you

•

operate Voice+ function, Voice+ function will be deactivated. During the Voice+ process, the MENU and PHOTO

•

button functions do not work. The Voice+ function does not affect the original sound

•

on the recorded tape. Sound is transferred from the internal microphone

•

on this camcorder to the connected AV device, when using the Voice+ function. So make sure that this microphone is not blocked. Adjust the sound volume on the connected external

•

device. (TV, etc.) Howling may occur near the speaker of an external device, please keep the camcorder at a distance from the external device. Before connecting, make sure that the volume on the external device is turned down. Forgetting this may cause howling from the external device's speakers.

TV

VCR

連接

VOICE+

使用

Voice+

•

當您想在其他 AV 裝置上播放或錄製已錄製的錄影帶影片時、您可

•

傳遞來自您攝錄放影機內部麥克風的聲音音效、而不是預先錄製的錄影帶上的音訊訊號。

Signal flow

Audio/Video Cable

來自內部麥克風的音效將被傳輸到所連接的

•

的預先錄製音效。

功能

功能只能在

Camcorder

Player

AV Jack

若要取消該功能、可再次按下

7.

Voice+

•

接不同的纜線（DV 或

VP-D385( i ))

如果您在操作

•

(///) 則在

Voice+

•

將不起作用。

Voice+

•

使用

•

的內部麥克風傳輸到連接的 AV 裝置。因此應確保麥克風沒有被堵塞。調整連接外部裝置上的音量。( 如電視機等 )

•

由於靠近外接裝置的揚聲器可能會發出尖銳的長

•

嗚、因此請使攝錄放影機與外部裝置保持一定的距離。在連接之前、確保已調低外部裝置的音量。

•

忘記調低音量可能會導致外接裝置的揚聲器發出尖銳的長嗚。

模式下操作。➥ 第 18 頁

將提供的聲訊 / 視訊線連接到

1.

攝錄放影機的 AV 插孔。配對終端的顏色、將線的另一端連

2.

接至

VCR/DVD

將選擇開關設定為

3.

VP-D385( i ))

用於

按下

MODE

4.

( ).

往該攝錄放影機放入您要播放的

5.

錄影帶。

在播放期間在想要的時間點按

6. 製開始 / 停止

( ) 指示器顯示在螢

Voice+

•

幕上、且螢幕上閃爍一會。

裝置上、來替代錄影帶上

AV

錄製開始 / 停止

僅當聲訊 / 視訊線連接時有效。如果連

、則

Voice+

過程中、

功能不會影響錄製的錄影帶上的原始音效。

功能時、音效將從該攝錄放影機上

Voice+

纜線（僅適用於

USB

功能可能無法正常工作。

Voice+

功能時移動

功能將被停用。

和

MENU

錄放影機 /電視機。

（僅適

TAPE

按鈕以設定

按鈕。

"VOICE+"

Joystick

PHOTO

Player

將會在

按鈕功能

錄

按鈕。

臺灣 _73

73_ English

RECORDING (COPYING) A TV PROGRAMME OR VIDEO TAPE

1.

2.

3.

AV

MODE

DV

POWER

CHG

OUTPUT

ONTO A CAMCORDER TAPE (VP-D381i/D382i/D385i ONLY)

The recording (copying) function works only in Player mode. ➥ page 18

•

Connect your camcorder to a VCR or a TV using the AV jack to record a

•

TV programme or copy a video tape onto a camcorder tape. Set the "AV In/Out" to "In" before recording (copying). ➥ page 68

•

Recording (Copying) onto a Camcorder Tape

1. Get your TV or VCR ready.

2. Connect the camcorder to your

VCR or TV with the Audio/Video cable.

Connect the Audio/Video cable

•

to the output jack on your VCR or TV The yellow jack: Video

•

The white jack: Audio

•

(L)- Mono The red jack: Audio (R)

•

3. Insert a blank tape in your camcorder.

VCR

or

TV

To record from a VCR

4. Insert the video tape to be played in your VCR.

Pause at the starting point of playing.

•

5. Start copying by pressing the Recording start/stop button on your camcorder.

6. Press the PLAY button on your VCR to play the tape.

To record from a TV

4. Select a TV channel to be recorded.

5. Start recording by pressing the Recording start/stop button on your

camcorder.

When Recording (Copying) is Complete:

Move down the Joystick (▼) on your camcorder to stop recording (copying).

If you operate the camcorder connected to another device, always

•

connect the camcorder to an AC outlet using the AC power adapter. The recorded contents can be played back in the same manner

•

as when playing back images recorded on this camcorder. Copy-protected video tapes such as Macrovision or unstable TV

•

signals cannot be recorded on this camcorder.

將電視節目或錄影帶錄製（複製）到攝錄放影機錄影帶

（

僅適用於

•

錄製（複製）到一個攝錄放影機錄影帶上。

Signal flow

Audio/Video Cable

要從VCR上錄製

4.

按攝錄放影機上的

5.

按 VCR 上的播放按鈕、以播放該錄影帶。

6.

要從電視機上錄製

4.

按攝錄放影機上的

5.

錄製（複製）完成時︰

按攝錄放影機上的

VP-D381i/D382i/D385i）

錄製（複製）功能僅可在使用 AV 插孔將攝錄放影機連接到 VCR 或電視機上、以將電視節目或錄影帶分別錄製或複製到攝錄放影機錄影帶中。錄製（複製）前、將

Camcorder

將錄影帶放入 VCR 中以播放。

在播放的起始點暫停。

•

選擇將要錄製的電視頻道。

如果在連接至另一裝置時操作攝錄放影機、應始終使用交流電源

•

適配器將攝錄放影機連接到交流插座上。錄製內容的播放方式可與在此攝錄放影機上播放錄製影像的方式

•

相同。不能在此攝錄放影機上錄製的受複製保護的內容（如 Macrovision）

•

或不穩定的 TV 信號。

Player

"AV In/Out"

AV Jack

錄製開始 / 停止

Joystick (▼)

模式中操作。 ➥第 18 頁

"In"

設定為

1.

2.

3.

按鈕以停止錄製（複製）。

。 ➥ 第 68 頁

準備好您的電視機或 VCR。使用聲訊 / 視訊纜線將攝錄放影

機連接 VCR 或電視機。

將聲訊 / 視訊纜線連接到

•

VCR 或電視機上的輸出插孔。黃色插孔：視訊

•

白色插孔： Audio(L)（聲訊

•

將空白錄影帶放入攝錄放影機中。

按鈕以開始複製。

按鈕以開始錄製。

（左））- 單聲道

紅色插孔： Audio(R)（聲訊

（右））

74_ English

臺灣 _74

digital still camera mode

P O W E R

C H G

BA

TT

.

(VP-D385( i ) only)

USING A MEMORY CARD (USABLE MEMORY CARD) (NOT SUPPLIED)

This camcorder can use SD memory cards and MMC

•

(Multi Media Cards). Some cards are not compatible depending on the memory card manufacturer and memory card type. The memory card stores and manages images

•

recorded by the camcorder. Before inserting or ejecting the memory card, turn the

•

miniDV camcorder off.

Memory Card Functions

Recording/Viewing Images.

•

Protecting Images from accidental erasure.

•

(except MMC) The MMC does not have a protection tab.

•

When using the MMC, be careful not to edit or delete data by mistake. Deleting images stored in memory card

•

Marking photo images with print Information

•

Formatting memory cards

•

Inserting a Memory Card

1. Open the memory card cover.

2. Insert the memory card into the memory card slot

until it softly clicks.

3. Close the memory card cover.

Ejecting a Memory Card

1. Open the memory card cover.

2. Slightly push the memory card inwards to pop it out.

3. Pull the memory card out of the slot and

close the memory card cover.

Terminals

Protection Tab

Label

MMC/SD

Protection Tab

Adapter

RS MMC/Mini SD

* RS MMC or Mini SD should be inserted

by using an Adapter (not supplied)

Label pasting portion

數位靜態相機模式

（僅適用於

使用記憶卡（可用記憶卡）（未提供）

Adapter

VP-D385( i ))

此攝錄放影機可以使用 SD 記憶卡和

•

（多媒體卡）。

類型而不相容。記憶卡可以儲存和處理以攝錄放影機所錄製的

•

影像。插入和退出記憶卡之前、先關閉

•

放影機。

記憶卡功能

錄製 / 檢視影像

•

避免影像被意外刪除。（

•

MMC

•

不要錯誤地進行編輯或刪除。刪除儲存在記憶卡中的影像

•

為相片影像標記列印資訊

•

格式化記憶卡

•

插入記憶卡

打開記憶卡蓋。

1.

將記憶卡插入記憶卡插槽中直到輕輕卡入到位。

2.

關閉記憶卡蓋。

3.

退出記憶卡

打開記憶卡蓋。

1.

輕輕地將記憶卡向內推使它彈出。

2.

將記憶卡拉出插槽並關閉記憶卡蓋。

3.

某些卡可能因記憶卡製造商和記憶卡

沒有保護標籤。

使用

MMC

除外）

MMC

攝錄

miniDV

時一定要小心、

* 1GB = 1,000,000,000 bytes; actual formatted capacity may be

less as the internal  rmware uses a portion of the memory.

* 1GB = 1,000,000,000 位元組 ﹔ 由於內部韌體使用了一部分記憶

體、因此實際格式化後的容量可能會小一些。

臺灣 _75

75_ English

Do not apply excessive force when you insert/eject the memory card.

MSAM SUNG

DCIM

MISC

SSMO V

. . .

100S SMOV SMOV 0001.A VI SMOV 0002.A VI

. . .

100S SDVC DCAM 0001.J PG DCAM 0002.J PG

. . .

1

2

3

•

Do not turn the power off while recording, loading, erasing a photo

•

image or formatting the memory card. Turn the power off before you insert or eject the memory card to avoid

•

losing data. Do not place the memory card near a strong electro-magnetic device.

•

Do not allow metal substances to come in contact with the terminals on the

•

memory card. Do not bend, drop or apply strong shock to memory card.

•

After removing the memory card from the camcorder, keep it in a

•

soft case to prevent static shock. The data stored on the memory card may be changed or lost as

•

a result of misuse, static electricity, electric noise or repair. Save important images separately. Samsung is not responsible for data loss due to misuse. RS-MMC or Mini SD should be inserted by using the Adaptor (not

•

supplied). In M.Cam or M.Player mode, the 16:9 wide mode is not supported.

•

The wide screen The camcorder supports up to 2GB SD/MMC and lower. SD/MMC

•

above 2GB may not record or play properly.

only displays in the aspect ratio of 4:3.

請勿在插入 / 退出記憶卡時過度用力。

•

請勿在錄製、載入、刪除相片影像或格式化記憶卡時關閉電

•

源。請勿在插入或退出記憶卡之前關閉電源以免遺失資料。

•

請勿將記憶卡放置在強大的電磁裝置附近。

•

請勿讓金屬物質接觸到記憶卡上的端子。

•

請不要將記憶卡彎曲、掉落或使它受到強大的衝撞。

•

從攝錄放影機取出記憶卡後、將其存放在軟盒中以防止靜

•

電損害。儲存在記憶卡上的資料可能會由於誤用、靜電、電源

•

噪訊或維修、而變更或遺失。將重要的影像分開儲存。

將不負責由於誤用所造成的資料遺失。

Samsung

或

RS MMC

•

在

M.Cam

•

寬螢幕僅以 4:3 的畫面比例顯示。攝錄放影機支援

•

SD/MMC

必須使用適配器插入（未提供）。

Mini SD

或

可能無法正常錄製或播放。

模式中、不支援 16:9 寬螢幕模式。

M.Player

2GB SD/MMC

及以下。超過

2GB

的

STRUCTURE OF FOLDERS AND FILES ON THE MEMORY CARD

The folder and  le structure for the memory card is as follows:

•

Do not arbitrarily change or remove the folder or  le name.

•

It may not be playable.

The  le naming follows DCF (Design rule for Camera File System).

•

Image con guration  le 1

This is where data for photo  les such as DPOF are stored.

Movie image  le 2

The movie images are formatted with a  le name as follows: SMOV_####.AVI. The  le number automatically increases when a new movie image  le is created. When the number of  les exceeds 99, a new folder is created and it is stored as

101SSMOV.

Photo image  le 3

As in movie image  les, the  le number automatically increases when a new image  le is created. When the

number of photo images exceeds 99, a new folder is created.

A new folder stores  les from DCAM_0001.JPG. The folder

name increases in the order of 100SSDVC 101 SSDVC, etc.

記憶卡中的資料夾與檔案結構

記憶卡的資料夾和檔案結構如下所示：

•

切勿隨意變更或移除資料夾或檔案名稱。可能會無法播放。

•

以

（相機檔案系統設計規則）開頭命名檔案。

DCF

•

影像配置檔案1

它用於儲存照片檔案（如

影片影像檔案2

格式化具有以下檔案名稱的影片影像：

。在建立新影片影像檔案時、會自動增加檔案編號。

AVI

在檔案編號超過 99 時、請建立新資料夾、並將其儲存為

101SSMOV

。

相片影像檔案3

如同在影片影像檔案中一樣、在建立新影像檔案時、會自動增加檔案編號。照片影像的數目超過 99 時、就會建立新的資料夾。新資料夾可從檔案。資料夾名稱會按順序增加。

）的資料。

DPOF

DCAM_0001.JPG

100SSDVC

SMOV_####.

101 SSDVC



開始儲存

等的

76_ English

臺灣 _76

digital still camera mode (VP-D385( i ) only)

Image format

Photo image

Photo images are compressed in JPEG

•

(Joint Photographic Experts Group) format.

The le extension is ".JPG"

•

The image size is 800x600. ➥page 78

•

(Tape Capture 640x480)

Movie image

Images are compressed in MPEG4

•

(Moving Picture Experts Group) format.

The le extension is ".AVI"

•

The picture size is 720X576. ➥page 84

•

Up to 99 les are created in one folder.

•

New folder is created when more than 99 les are created. You may modify the name of a le/folder stored in the memory

•

card) using a PC.

les.

Number of Images on the Memory Card

Photo Size 128MB 256MB 512MB 1GB 2GB

800x600

Approx.

600

The number of images that can be stored on a memory card

•

depends on various conditions. Photo images (JPEG) can be stored in the memory card up to

•

20,000 les.

Recording time available on the Memory Card

Moving

image

These times are approximate as recording capacities can be

•

affected by variables such as subject matter and memory card type.

128MB 256MB 512MB 1GB 2GB

Approx.

8min

This camcorder may not recognise modied

Approx.

1200

16min

Approx.

2400

Approx.

32min

Approx.

4830

Approx.

64min

Approx.

120min

數位靜態相機模式

（僅適用於

影像格式

相片影像

相片影像以

•

檔案副檔名為

•

影像大小為 800x600。 ➥第 78 頁（拍攝錄影帶 640x480）。

•

影片影像

影像以

•

檔案副檔名為

•

圖片大小為 720X576。 ➥第 84 頁

•

記憶卡中的影像張數

相片大小

800x600

9740

在記憶卡上可錄製的時間

運動 影像

這些時間都是近似值、回為錄製容量受各種變數的影響、如主體

•

材料和記憶卡類型。

VP-D385( i ))

（聯合影像專家群組）格式進行壓縮。

JPEG

。

"JPG"

（動態視訊專家小組）格式進行壓縮。

MPEG4

一個資料夾中最多可建立 99 個檔案。在建立的檔案數目超過

•

99 時、會建立新資料夾。您可以使用電腦修改儲存在記憶卡中的檔案 / 資料夾名稱。

•

此攝錄放影機可能無法識別修改的檔案。

記憶卡上可儲存的影像數取決於各種條件。

•

相片影像 (JPEG) 可在記憶卡中儲存多達 20,000 個檔案。

•

。

".AVI"

128MB 256MB 512MB 1GB 2GB

大約

128MB 256MB 512MB 1GB 2GB

張

大約

8 分鐘

600

大約

1200

張

大約

16 分鐘

大約

2400

張

大約

32 分鐘

大約

張

大約

64 分鐘

4830

大約

120 分鐘

9740

張

SETTING THE FILE NUMBER (FILE NO.)

BATT

.

CHG

MODE

TAPECARD

Photo Quality



Super Fine

MovMove Selelec t ExiExit

MENU

M.Cam Mode

MemoryMemory

File No.



Series

MovMove Selelec t ExiExit

MENU

M.Cam Mode

File No.

MemoryMemory

✔

Series

Reset

File number setting works only in M.Cam mode.

•

➥

page 18

File numbers are given to images in the order

•

they were recorded when they are stored on the memory card. File numbers may be set as follows:

•

- "Series": When there are existing ﬁ les,

- "Reset": When there are no ﬁ les stored

1. Set the Select switch to CARD. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ).

2.

3. Press the MENU button.

•

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Memory", then press the Joystick.

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "File No.", then press the Joystick.

6. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select the desired option "Series" or "Reset", then press the Joystick.

7. To exit, press the MENU button.

77_ English

the new image will be named as the next number in the sequence.

on the memory card, the ﬁ le numbering starts from 0001.

The menu list will appear.

When you set "File No." to "Series", each ﬁ le is assigned with a different number so as to avoid duplicating ﬁ le names. It is convenient when you want to manage your ﬁ les on a PC.

設定檔案編號 (

當您將個不同的編號以避免檔案名稱重複。如果您在電腦上管理檔案、

FILE NO.

檔案編號設定僅可在

•

➥

將為影像提供檔案編號以便在儲存到記憶卡上時

•

記錄。檔案編號可設定如下：

•

-

將選擇開關設定為

1.

按下

2.

按下

3.

•

向上或向下移動

4.

"Memory"

向上或向下移動

5.

"File No."

向上或向下移動

6.

選項

要結束、可按下

7.

"File No."

)

模式下操作。

第 18 頁

"Series" "Reset"

MODE MENU

將會顯示選單清單。

、然後按下

"Series"或"Reset"

設定為

M.Cam

: 當存在現有檔案時、新影像將會按下

一個數字順序命名。

: 當記憶卡中沒有已儲存的檔案時、

檔案的編號將從 0001 開始。

。

CARD

按鈕以設定

Camera

按鈕。

Joystick

MENU

"Series"

(▲ /

Joystick

▼

(▲ /

。

Joystick

▼)

(▲ /

、然後按下

按鈕。

時、會為每個檔案指定一

( )

▼

以選擇

)

。

以選擇

)

以選擇所需的

這樣就非常方便。

.

Joystick

臺灣 _77

。

78_ English

臺灣 _78

digital still camera mode

BA

TT .

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

10Sec

REC

SP

16:9 Wide

16BIt

S

C.Nite 1/30

No Tape !

12:00 1.JAN.2008

W T

29

1/50

M

60min

4536

數位靜態相機模式

(VP-D385( i ) only)

TAKING A PHOTO IMAGE (JPEG) ON THE MEMORY CARD

You may take photo images while in M.Cam mode

•

and store the images on the memory card.

➥

page 18

You can take photo images using the remote control.

•

1. Set the Select switch to CARD.

2. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ).

3.

After framing your object to record, fully press

the PHOTO button to take the picture.

The picture is taken and saved into the memory

•

card within a few seconds. Taking another picture within this interval is not

•

possible. A shutter sound is heard. When the " "

•

indicator disappears, the photo image has been recorded.

Photo images are saved more widely than

•

have been taken in LCD screen. Photo images are saved in the memory card

•

in an 800x600 format. The number of photo images that can be

•

stored depends on the quality of the image. Photo images (JPEG) can be stored in a

•

memory card up to 20,000  les.

The photo images that you recorded are

•

saved in JPEG  le format on the memory card.

In M.Cam or M.Player mode, the 16:9 wide

•

mode is not supported. The wide mode only displays in the aspect ratio of 4:3. Audio will not be recorded with the photo image on the memory

•

card. Do not operate the POWER switch or remove the memory

•

card while recording photo images. Doing so may damage the memory card.

（僅適用於

拍攝記憶卡上的相片影像(

您可以在

•

在記憶卡中。 ➥第 18 頁您可以使用遙控器拍攝相片影像。

•

將選擇開關設定為

1.

按下

2.

框住要錄製的物體後、完全按下

3.

以拍攝相片。

相片將在數秒內拍攝、然後儲存在記憶卡內。

•

您不可能在儲存相片期間拍攝另一張相片。

•

將聽到快門聲音。當

•

就表示已錄製照片影像。

VP-D385( i ))

JPEG

)

模式下拍攝相片影像、並將影像儲存

M.Cam

。

CARD

按鈕以設定

MODE

儲存的相片影像會比在

•

的更寬。相片影像可以 800x600 格式儲存在記憶卡中。

•

可儲存相片影像的張數取決於影像的品質。

•

相片影像 (

•

JPEG

20,000 個檔案。您所錄製的相片影像則會以存在記憶卡上。在

或

M.Cam

wide 螢幕模式。寬模式僅惟 4:3 的畫面比例顯示。不會透過記憶卡上的相片影像來錄製音訊。在錄製相片影像時請勿操作取出記憶卡。這樣做可能會損壞記憶卡。

M.Player

( ).

Camera

PHOTO

指示符出現時、

" "

螢幕中所拍攝

LCD

) 可在記憶卡中儲存多達

檔案格式儲

JPEG

模式中、不支援 16:9

POWER

按鈕

開關或

SP

60mi

60minn

MIX[1+2

MIX[1+2]]

16BI

16BItt

S

AV I

AV Inn

12:00 1.JAN.200

12:00 1.JAN.20088

1/1/3

3

800X600

100-000

100-00011

MovMove Selelec t ExiExit

MENU

Delete

M.Player Mode

M.Play Select

Delete All Protect Print Mark Format

1/3

✔

Photo

Movie

MemoryMemory

SP

60mi60minn

MIX[1+2MIX[1+2]]

16BI16BItt

S

AV IAV Inn

12:00 1.JAN.20012:00 1.JAN.20088

1/1/33

SlidSlidee

800X600800X600

100-000100-00011

100-0001 1/3

Move Select

VIEWING PHOTO IMAGES (JPEG)

This function works only in M.Player mode. ➥page 18

•

You can play back and view photo images recorded on the memory card. Be sure that the M.Play Select is set to Photo in the

•

menu. ➥page 86

1. Set the Select switch to CARD.

2. Press the MODE button to set Player ( ).

The last recorded image appears. If there

•

are no recorded images on the memory card,

"No image!" is displayed.

To view a Single Image

Move the Joystick ( desired photo image.

To view the next image: Move the Joystick (X) to

•

the right. To view the previous image: Move the Joystick (W)

•

to the left. Press and hold the Joystick (

•

left or right to quickly scan for a photo image.

/

) left or right, search for the

W

X

/

W

X

) to either the

To view a Slide Show

Press the Joystick.

The "Slide" is displayed. The Slide Show will start

•

from the current picture. All images will be played back consecutively for

•

2~3 seconds each.

To stop the slide show, press the Joystick again.

To view the Multi Display

If you move down the Joystick (T) ( ), you will see a message of "Please wait.." and 6 photo images on the screen in a moment.

To display the previous six images, press and hold

•

the Joystick (W) for about 3 seconds. To display the next six images, press and hold the

•

Joystick (X) button for about 3 seconds. Move the Joystick (W/X/S/T) to search for the desired photo image.

•

To return to single playback mode, press the Joystick again.

79_ English

Selected picture is displayed in full screen.

•

Any large sized image taken with another device will be displayed as a thumbnail image.

檢視相片影像 (JPEG)

此功能僅可在

•

您可以播放和檢視錄製在記憶卡內的相片影像。確保將選單中的

•

➥

第 86 頁

開關設定為

1. 將選擇

按下

2.

•

按鈕以設定

MODE

最後錄製的影像將會顯示。如果記憶卡內沒有已錄製的影像、

若要檢視單一影像

向左或向右移動影像。

若要檢視下一個影像：向右移動

•

若要檢視上一個影像：向左移動

•

向左或是向右按住

•

描相片影像。

若要檢視連續放映

按下

•

。

Joystick

將會顯示。連續放映將會從目前相片開始。

"Slide"

所有影像將連續各播放 2~3 秒鐘。若要停止幻燈片、可再次按下

若要檢視多顯示

如果向下移動

"Please wait...."

像。

•

若要返回至單一播放模式、可再次按下

•

任何以其他裝置拍攝的大型影像將顯示為縮圖影像。

Joystick

若要顯示先前的六張影像、可按住 3 秒種。若要顯示之後的六張影像、可按住按鈕 3 秒種。移動

Joystick

像。

選取的相片會以全螢幕顯示。

模式下操作。 ➥第 18 頁

M.Player

M.Play Select

CARD

"No image!"

Joystick

(

Joystick

(T) (

、並會在螢幕上即刻出現 6 張相片影

(W/X/S/T) 以搜尋所需的相片影

設定為

。

( ).

Player

將會顯示。

/

以搜尋所需的相片

W

X

)

Joystick Joystick

(W / X) 以快速掃

。

您將會看見訊息

),

Photo

Joystick Joystick

Joystick

臺灣 _79

。

(X) 。 (W) 。

(W)

(X)

。

Move Se lect Exit

MENU

Delete

M.Player Mode

M.Play Select

Delete All Protect Print Mark Format

1

/3

Memory

Off

On

✔

1/3

800X600

100-0001

digital still camera mode (VP-D385( i ) only)

數位靜態相機模式

（僅適用於

VP-D385( i )

)

PROTECTION FROM ACCIDENTAL ERASURE (PROTECT)

The Protection function works only in M.Player mode. ➥page 18

•

You can protect important images from accidental erasure.

•

If you format the camcorder, all images including protected images will be erased.

1. Set the Select switch to CARD.

2. Press the MODE button to set Player ( ).

The last recorded image appears.

•

If there are no recorded images on the memory

•

card, "No image!" is displayed.

3. Move the Joystick ( the photo image that you want to protect.

4. Press the MENU button.

The menu list will appear.

•

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select

6. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select

7.

8. To exit, press the MENU button.

80_ English 臺灣 _80

, then press the Joystick.

"Memory"

"Protect", then press the Joystick.

Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select

, then press the Joystick.

"On"

Protection ( ) indicator is displayed.

•

If the write protection tab on the memory card is set to

•

LOCK, you cannot set image protection. Protected images can not be removed in any way even by

•

executing the "Delete All" command in the menu.

/

) left or right, search for





保護以防意外刪除 (PROTECT)

保護功能僅可在

•

您可以保護重要的影像以防止意外刪除。

•

若您將攝錄放影機格式化、所有影像包括受保護的影像將被刪除。

將

1.

按下

2.

•

向左或向右移動

3.

4.

•

向上或向下移動

5.

向上或向下移動

6.

向上或向下移動

7.

8.

•

若記憶卡上的寫入保護標籤設定為「鎖定」、您就不能設定影

•

像保護。保護的影像無法以任何方式刪除、即使您透過執行選單中的

•

"Delete All"

模式下操作。 ➥ 第 18 頁

M.Player

開關設定為

選擇

按鈕以設定

MODE

最後錄製的影像將會顯示。如果記憶卡內沒有已錄製的影像、將會顯示。

的相片影像。

按下

"Memory"

"Protect"

然後按下

要結束、可按下

按鈕。

MENU

將會顯示選單清單。

、然後按下

Joystick

Protection

指令。

。

CARD

Player



Joystick (

( ▲ / ▼ ) 以選擇

Joystick

( ▲ / ▼ ) 以選擇

Joystick

( ▲ / ▼ ) 以選擇

Joystick

。

按鈕。

MENU

( ) 指示器會顯示。

( )。

"No image!"

/

以搜尋您想保護



)

。

"On"

、

Move Select Exit

MENU

Delete

M.Player Mode

M.Play Select

Delete All Protect Print Mark Format

1

/3

Memory

12:00 1.JAN.2008

002

Slide

640X480

1/3

100-0001

Yes No

Do you want to delete?

640X480

100-0001

12:00 1.JAN.2008

002

Slide

1/3

Now deleting...

DELETING PHOTO IMAGES AND MOVING IMAGES (DELETE)

The Delete function works only in M.Player mode. ➥page 18

•

You can erase the photo images and moving images recorded on

•

the memory card.

To delete a protected image, rst cancel image protection.

•

Once you delete an image, you cannot restore

•

it. Check the images to delete carefully before deleting them.

1. Set the Select switch to CARD.

2.

Press the MODE button to set Player ( ).

The last recorded image appears.

•

If there are no recorded images on the memory

•

card, "No image!" is displayed.

3.

Move the Joystick for the photo image that you want to delete.

/

(

)

left or right, search





4. Press the MENU button. The menu list will appear.

•

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select

"Memory"

, then press the Joystick.

6. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select

"Delete", then press the Joystick.

A message "Do you want to delete?" is

•

displayed.

7. Move the Joystick (

"Yes" or "No", then press the Joystick.

/

) left or right to select





Using the Joystick

You can directly access the delete function using the Joystick.

•

1. Move up the Joystick (▲) to select "Delete ( )". A message "Do you want to delete?" is displayed.

•

2. Move the Joystick (

81_ English 臺灣 _81

press the Joystick.

/

) left or right to select "Yes" or "No", then





刪除相片影像和動態影像 (DELETE)

Delete 功能僅可在

•

您可以刪除錄製在記憶卡內的相片影像和動態影像。

•

若要刪除受保護的影像、首先要取消影像保護。

•

Delete 影像後、您便無法將其恢復。請在刪除前檢查影像以小心地

•

刪除。

將

1.

按下

2.

•

向左或向右移動

3.

的相片影像。

按下

4.

•

向上或向下移動

5. "Memory"

向上或向下移動

6. "Delete"

•

向左或向右移動

7. "No"

模式下操作。 ➥第 18 頁

M.Player

開關設定為

選擇

按鈕以設定

MODE

最後錄製的影像將會顯示。

CARD

。

Player

( )。

如果記憶卡內沒有已錄製的影像、將會顯示。

/



( ▲ / ▼ ) 以選擇

Joystick

( ▲ / ▼ ) 以選擇

。

Joystick

/



。



)

。



)

Joystick (

按鈕。

MENU

將會顯示選單清單。

Joystick

、然後按下

Joystick

、然後按下

一則

"Do you want to delete?"

、然後按下

Joystick (

Joystick

"No image!"

以搜尋您想刪除

訊息將會顯示。

以選擇

使用 Joystick

使用

•

向上移動

1.

•

向左或向右移動

2. "No"

、您可以直接進入刪除功能。

Joystick

( ▲ ) 以選擇

Joystick

一則

"Do you want to delete?"

、然後按下

Joystick (

Joystick

/





。

"Delete ( )"

訊息將會顯示。

以選擇

)

"Yes"

或

。

或

Move Select Exit

MENU

Delete

M.Player Mode

M.Play Select

Delete All Protect Print Mark Format

1

/3

Memory

12:00 1.JAN.2008

002

Slide

640X480

1/3

100-0001

Yes No

Do you want to delete all?

640X480

100-0001

12:00 1.JAN.2008

002

Slide

1/3

Now deleting...

digital still camera mode (VP-D385( i ) only)

Deleting All Images at Once

1. Set the Select switch to CARD.

2. Press the MODE button to set Player ( ).

The last recorded image appears.

•

If there are no recorded images on the memory

•

card, "No image!" is displayed.

3. Move the Joystick ( photo image that you want to delete.

4. Press the MENU button.

The menu list will appear.

•

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Memory", then press the Joystick.

6. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Delete All", then press the Joystick.

A message "Do you want to delete all?" is

•

displayed.

7. Move the Joystick ( or "No", then press the Joystick.

8. To exit, press the MENU button.

When there is no stored picture on the

•

memory card, the message "No image!" will be displayed.

If an erroneous image le is found on the

•

memory card, the message "Memory Card Error!" will be displayed It may be caused by copying images from different digital devices. To protect important pictures from accidental

•

deletion, activate the image protection.

➥

page 80

You can use the format functions to

•

completely delete all images and options on the memory card, including protected images.

➥

page 83

Deleting all les using the "Delete All" menu

•

82_ English 臺灣 _82

may take a while. To delete all les much

faster, format the memory card after backing

up the les onto another storage device.

/

) left or right, search for the





/

) left or right to select "Yes"





.

數位靜態相機模式

（僅適用於

VP-D385( i ))

立即刪除所有影像

將

開關設定為

1.

選擇

按下

2.

•

向左或向右移動

3.

的相片影像。

按下

4.

•

向上或向下移動

5. "Memory"

向上或向下移動

6. All"

•

向左或向右移動

7. "No"

要結束、可按下

8.

按鈕以設定

MODE

最後錄製的影像將會顯示。如果記憶卡內沒有已錄製的影像、將會顯示。

Joystick (

按鈕。

MENU

將會顯示選單清單。

Joystick

、然後按下

、然後按下一則示。

、然後按下

•

Joystick

"Do you want to delete all?"

Joystick (

MENU

若記憶卡上沒有儲存的相片、將會顯示

訊息。

image!"

若在記憶卡上找到錯誤的影像檔案、將會顯示訊息

"Memory Card Error!"

從不同的數位裝置複製影像所造成。若要防止重要的相片意外被刪除、必須啟動影像保護。 ➥ 第 80 頁您可以使用格式化功能完全刪除記憶卡上的所有影像和選項、包括受保護的影像。 ➥ 第 83 頁使用

"Delete All"

要一段時間。若要更快刪除所有檔案、請將檔案備份到其他儲存裝置之後才格式化記憶卡。

。

CARD

( )。

Player

/





( ▲ / ▼ ) 以選擇

。

Joystick

( ▲ / ▼ ) 以選擇

。

/





。

Joystick

按鈕。

選單來刪除所有檔案可能需

"No image!"

以搜尋您想刪除

)

"Delete

訊息將會顯

以選擇

)

"Yes"

"No

。這可能是由於

或

Move Select Exit

MENU

Delete

M.Player Mode

M.Play Select

Delete All Protect Print Mark Format

1

/3

Memory

12:00 1.JAN.2008

002

Slide

640X480

1/3

100-0001

Yes No

All files will be deleted ! Do you want to format?

100-0001

12:00 1.JAN.2008

002

Slide

1/3

Now formatting...

640X480

FORMATTING A MEMORY CARD (FORMAT)

The format function works only in M.Player mode.

•

➥

page 18

You can use the format functions to completely

•

delete all images and options on the memory card, including protected images. The format function restores the memory card to

•

its initial state.

1. Set the Select switch to CARD.

2. Press the MODE button to set Player ( ).

3. Press the MENU button.

The menu list will appear.

•

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select

"Memory"

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select

6. Move the Joystick (

7. To exit, press the MENU button.

WARNING

83_ English 臺灣 _83

, then press the Joystick.

"Format"

, then press the Joystick.

A message "All les will be deleted! Do

•

you want to format?" is displayed.

"Yes" or "No", then press the Joystick.

"Complete!"

•

completed.

If you execute the format function, all photo

•

images/moving images will be erased completely and erased photo images/moving images cannot be recovered. Formatting the

•

cause Do not turn the power off in the middle of the formatting.

•

A

memory card

•

be formatted. ➥page 74 Do not format the

•

"Not formatted!"

formatted on a PC is inserted.

If you execute the format function, all images will be erased completely and erased images cannot be recovered.

/

) left or right to select





is displayed when the format is

memory card

using a different device will

read errors.

with the protection tab set to save will not

memory card

message may appear if a

on a PC.

memory card

格式化記憶卡 (FORMAT)

格式化功能僅可在

•

您可以使用格式化功能完全刪除記憶卡上的所有影

•

像和選項、包括受保護的影像。格式化功能會將記憶卡還原為起始狀態。

•

將

1.

按下

2.

按下

3.

•

向上或向下移動

4. "Memory"

向上或向下移動

5. "Format"

•

向左或向右移動

6. "No"

•

要結束、可按下

7.

警告

模式下操作。➥ 第 18 頁

M.Player

開關設定為

選擇

按鈕以設定

MODE

按鈕。

MENU

將會顯示選單清單。

、然後按下

會顯示出

"All fi les will be deleted! Do you

want to format?"

、然後按下

在完成格式化後、將會顯示出

若您執行格式化功能、所有相片 / 動態影像將

•

會完全被刪除、且刪除的相片 / 動態影像將無法恢復。使用其他裝置來格式化記憶卡將造成記憶卡讀

•

取錯誤。切勿在格式化期間關閉電源。

•

保護標籤設定為儲存的記憶卡將不會被格式

•

化。➥第 74 頁請勿在電腦上格式化記憶卡。如果插入在電腦

•

上格式化的記憶卡、則可能會出現訊息

formatted!"。

若您執行格式化功能、所有影像將會完全被刪除、且刪除的影像將無法恢復。

CARD

Joystick

訊息。

Joystick (

Joystick

按鈕。

MENU

。

( )。

Player

( ▲ / ▼ ) 以選擇

。

( ▲ / ▼ ) 以選擇

。

/

以選擇





)

。

"Complete!"。

"Yes"

"Not

或

84_ English

臺灣 _84

digital still camera mode



 



C H

G

SP

16BIt

60min

0:00:00

REC

數位靜態相機模式

(VP-D385( i ) only)

RECORDING MOVING IMAGES (MPEG) ON A MEMORY CARD

You may record moving images while in M.Cam mode and store

•

the images on a memory card. ➥page 18 You can record moving images with audio on a memory card.

•

The screen format of the moving image to be recorded is 720X576.

•

Saving moving images onto a Memory Card

1. Set the Select switch to CARD.

2. Press the MODE button to set Camera ( ).

3. Press the Recording start/stop button, the

moving images are recorded on the memory card in MPEG4.

"REC●" is displayed on the LCD screen.

•

You can record a photo image on memory card

•

by pressing the PHOTO button instead of the

Recording start/stop button. ➥page 78

4. Press the Recording start/stop button to stop the

recording.

（僅適用於

VP-D385( i ))

錄製記憶卡上的動態影像(

您可以在

•

➥

第 18 頁

您可以將動態影像和聲訊錄製到記憶卡上。

•

將錄製的動態影像的螢幕格式為 720x576。

•

模式下錄製動態影像、並將影像儲存在記憶卡中。

M.Cam

將動態影像儲存到記憶卡上

將選擇開關設定為

1.

按下

2.

按下

3.

檔案格式錄製到記憶卡上。

•

按下

4.

按鈕以設定相機

MODE

錄製開始 / 停止

會出現在

"REC●"

您可以透過按下

按鈕、將相片影像錄製到記憶卡上。

/ 停止

➥

第 78 頁

錄製開始 / 停止

MPEG

)

。

CARD

Camera

按鈕、動態影像將以

螢幕上。

LCD

按鈕、而非

PHOTO

按鈕以停止錄製。

( ).

MPEG4

錄製開始

臺灣 _85

85_ English

RECORDING MOVING IMAGES (MPEG) ON A MEMORY CARD

Up tp 2000 MPEG les can be stored on a memory card.

•

MPEG les (moving images) can be recorded up to 2 GB

•

per a moving le.

Before using the recording a moving image function,

•

check whether the memory card is inserted into the camcorder. MENU button is not available while recording a moving

•

image. To use MENU button, stop recording. Recording a moving image is not available when a MENU is displayed on the screen. To start recording, press the MENU button to make the menu disappear. Moving images that you recorded are saved in *.avi (avi

•

1.0) le format on the memory card.

The moving images on a memory card are a smaller size

•

and lower denition than images on tape.

The sound is recorded in mono.

•

The following functions are not allowed in M.Cam mode.

•

"DIS", "Digital Zoom", "Fade", "Program AE", "Visual Effect","16:9 Wide","C.Nite"

While recording on a memory card, don’t insert or eject

•

the tape as it may record noise. While recording on a memory card, don’t eject the

•

memory card or it may break the data on the memory card or memory card itself. Turning the power off while accessing the memory card

•

may damage the data stored on the memory card.

錄製記憶卡上的動態影像(

最多可在記憶卡上保存

•

每種動態檔案可錄製高達

•

使用錄製動態影像功能之前、請檢查記憶卡是否已插入攝

•

錄放影機。

按鈕在錄製動態影像時不可用。若要使用

MENU

•

鈕、可停止錄製。錄製動態影像功能在開始錄製、按您所錄製的動態影像則會以

•

記憶卡上。記憶卡上的動態影像比錄影帶上的影像具有更小的尺寸和

•

更低的清晰度。聲音將以單聲道模式錄製。

•

以下功能無法在

•

Zoom"、"Fade"、"Program AE"、"Visual Effect" "16:9 Wide"、"C.Nite"

在錄製到記憶卡時、請勿插入或退出錄影帶、因為這可能

•

會發出噪音。在記憶卡上進行錄製時、請勿退出記憶卡、否則可能會損

•

壞記憶卡上的資料或損壞記憶卡。在存取記憶卡時關閉電源、可能損毀儲存在記憶卡內

•

的資料。

MENU

M.Cam

MPEG

)

2000 MPEG

MENU

按鈕以使選單消失。

模式中操作。

檔案。

的

2 GB

顯示在螢幕上時不可用。若要

*.avi (avi 1.0)

檔案（動態影像）。

MPEG

檔案格式儲存在

"DIS"、"Digital

MENU

、

按

Move Select Exit

MENU

Delete

M.Player Mode

M.Play Select

Delete All Protect

Print Mark

Format

1

/3

✔

Photo

Movie

Memory

100-0007

1/3

Move Sel ect

12:00 1.JAN.2008

0:00:04

SMOV0007

12:00 1.JAN.2008

1/3

STOP

digital still camera mode (VP-D385( i ) only)

PLAYING THE MOVING IMAGES (MPEG) ON A MEMORY CARD (M.PLAY SELECT)

The moving Images playback function works only in M. Player mode. ➥page 18

•

You can play the moving images on a memory card.

•

The playback picture will be of higher quality if it is viewed on a PC rather than on a TV.

•

1. Set the Select switch to CARD.

2. Press the MODE button to set Player ( ).

3. Press the MENU button.

The menu list will appear.

•

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Memory", then press the Joystick.

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "M.Play Select", then press the Joystick.

6. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Movie", then press the Joystick.

7. To exit the menu, press the MENU button.

8. Move the Joystick (/) to search for the desired moving image,

then press the Joystick.

The moving images recorded on the memory card will be played back.

•

9. To stop the playback,

Use the Zoom lever to adjust the volume in STOP mode.

•

Move down the Joystick ( ) in STOP mode.

•

- You will see a message of

- Move the

Use the Joystick to enjoy various playback operations.Press

•

the Joystick to pause or play back.

- Move the

•

move down the Joystick ().

images on the screen in a moment.

Joystick (///) to search for the desired

moving image, then press the Joystick.

Joystick right or left to search playback during

playback or pause mode.

MENU button is not available during moving image playback. To use MENU button, stop playback. Moving image playback is not available when a MENU is displayed on the screen. To start playback, press MENU button to make it disappear. There may be broken or mosaic pictures while playing the moving images, but it is not a malfunction. The moving images that you recorded on the memory card may not play on other manufacturer’s equipment. The moving images recorded by another camcorder may not play on this camcorder. To play back moving images on a PC, the video codec (in the CD provided with the camcorder) should be installed.

- You need Microsoft Windows Media Player version 9 or higher version in order to play moving images on the memory card on your PC.

- You can download Microsoft Windows Media Player with your desired language from the Microsoft website, "http://www.microsoft.com/ windows/windowsmedia/download/default.asp".

"Please wait.." and 6 moving

數位靜態相機模式

（僅適用於 VP-D385( i ))

播放記憶卡上的動態影像 (MPEG)（M.PLAY 選擇）

動態影像播放功能僅可在

•

您可在記憶卡上播放動態影像。

•

若在電腦而非電視機上檢視、播放畫面的品質將會更高。

•

將

1.

選擇

按下

2.

按下

3.

•

向上或向下移動

4. Joystick

向上或向下移動

5.

後按下

向上或向下移動

6. Joystick

若要結束選單、可按下

7.

向左或向右移動

8.

按下

•

若要停止播放、可向下移動

9.

•

模式下操作。 ➥ 第 18 頁

M. Player

開關設定為

MODE

MENU

將會顯示選單清單。

。

Joystick

。

Joystick

將播放錄製在記憶卡上的動態影像。

在 STOP 模式中使用縮放桿調整音量。在 STOP 模式中向下移動

- 您將會看看見訊息現 6 張動態影像。

- 移動按下

使用

Joystick

- 按下

- 在播放或暫停模式期間、向右或向左移動播放點。

在進行動態播放時、

•

用

MENU

播放動態影像時會出現破損或馬賽克相片、這並非故障。

•

您錄製在記憶卡上的動態影像也許無法在其他製造商的

•

裝置上播放。採用其他攝錄放影機所錄製的動態影像可能無法在本攝

•

錄放影機上播放。若要在電腦上播放動態影像、必須安裝視訊轉碼器（位

•

於攝錄放影機隨附的光碟上）。

- 您必須擁有 Microsoft Windows Media Player 版本 9 或

- 您可以從 Microsoft 網站："http://www.microsoft.com/

。

CARD

按鈕以設定

按鈕。

Joystick

。

Joystick

Joystick (

。

Joystick Joystick

Joystick

MENU

顯示在螢幕上時不可用。若要開始播放、可按

按鈕以使它消失。

以上版本、才可在電腦上播放記憶卡內的動態影像。

windows/windowsmedia/download/default.asp"、下載您所要的語言版本之 Microsoft Windows MediaPlayer。

( )。

Player

( ▲ / ▼ ) 以選擇

MENU



Joystick

"Please wait.."

(///)

。

以進行各種播放操作。

以暫停或播放。

按鈕、可停止播放。動態影像播放功能在

"Memory"

"M.Play Select"

"Movie"

按鈕。

/

以搜尋所需的動態影像、然後



)

( ▼ ).

( )

Joystick

MENU

。

、稍後便會在螢幕上出

以搜尋所需的動態影像、然後

Joystick

按鈕不可用。若要使

、然後按下

、然

以搜尋

86_ English 臺灣 _86

臺灣 _87

87_ English

RECORDING AN IMAGE FROM A TAPE AS

M O

D

E

A

V

D

V

P

O W

E R

C H

G

V O

L

PHOTO

12:00 1.JAN.2008

AV In

STOP

16BIt

S

MIX[1+2]

60min

0:00:16:24

SP

Photo Copy

12:00 1.JAN.2008

AV In

STOP

16BIt

S

MIX[1+2]

60min

0:00:16:24

SP

Now coping...

A PHOTO IMAGE

This function works only in Player mode.

•

➥

page 18

Your camcorder can read moving image data

•

recorded on a tape, and record it as a photo image on a memory card.

將錄影帶中的影像錄製成相片影像

此功能僅可在

•

您的攝錄放影機可讀取錄製在錄影帶上的動態影

•

像資料、而且在記憶卡上會將其記錄為相片影像。

模式下操作。 ➥第 18 頁

Player

Before operation

Insert a recorded tape and a memory card into your camcorder.

1. Set the Select switch to TAPE.

2. Press the MODE button to set Player ( ).

3. Press the Joystick, playback the cassette.

The image recorded on the tape is played back.

•

4. Press the PHOTO button. The photo image is recorded on the memory

•

card. During the time it takes to save an image, the

•

playback screen is paused and the OSD is displayed.

5. When you  nish the recording, move down the

Joystick (▼) to stop recoding and switch the mode to M. Player for your visual reference.

➥

page 79

Photo images copied from the cassette to the memory card

•

are saved in 640x480 format. Number of images you can save varies depending on the

•

image resolution.

操作之前

將錄製的錄影帶和記憶卡插入攝錄放影機。

將選擇開關設定為

1.

按下

2.

按下

3.

•

按

4.

•

完成錄製後、向下移動

5.

製產、然後將此模式切換到

按鈕以設定

MODE

Joystick

錄製在錄影帶上的影像會被播放。

按鈕。

PHOTO

相片影像已錄製到記憶卡上。在儲存影像期間、播放畫面將暫停、而將會顯示。

參考。 ➥第 79 頁

從錄影帶複製到記憶卡上的相片影像、將會以 640x480 格式

•

儲存。您可儲存的影像張數取決於影像解析度。

•

。

TAPE

Player

、播放錄影帶。

Joystick

( ).

(▼)

M. Player

以停止錄

以供視訊

OSD

88_ English

臺灣 _88

digital still camera mode

Move Select Exi t

Photo Copy Audio Select Audio Effect

Player Mode

MENU

Photo Search

Tape

16Bit

W T

S

10Sec

No Tape !

29

1/50

M

57min

0:03:30:23

SP

Photo Cooy

MENU

Exit

Back

Photo searching...

12:00 1.JAN.2008

AV In

STOP

16BIt

S

[1+2]

56minPhoto Copy

3/3

SP

Now coping...

MENU

Exit

Back

(VP-D385( i ) only)

COPYING A PHOTO IMAGE FROM A TAPE TO A MEMORY CARD (PHOTO COPY)

The photo copy function works only in Player mode.

•

➥

page 18

Using the search function, you can automatically

•

take in only photo image from tapes recorded in your miniDV camcorder and record them on a memory card in sequence.

Before operation

Insert a tape recorded in your miniDV camcorder

•

and rewind the tape. Insert a memory card into your camcorder.

•

1. Set the Select switch to TAPE.

2. Press the MODE button to set Player ( ).

3. Press the MENU button.

The menu list will appear.

•

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Tape", then press the Joystick.

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Photo Copy", then press the Joystick.

All photo images recorded on the cassette tape

•

will be copied onto a memory card.

6. The camcorder automatically performs the photo

image search to  nd photo images and copy starts.

7.

Move down the Joystick (▼)

Copy stops when the cassette is  nished or

•

memory card is full.

8. Switch to the M.Player mode before you can see the photo image.

➥

page 79

The last photo image of the tape-recorded will be displayed.

•

to stop copying.

Photo images copied from the cassette to the memory card are saved in 640x480 format. Even when you have copied the photo images recorded on the tape into the memory card, they still remain on the tape.

數位靜態相機模式

（僅適用於

將錄影帶中的相片影像複製到記憶卡

PHOTO COPY

(

在查看相片影像之前請切換到

8.

已錄製錄影帶的最後一張相片影像將得以顯示。

•

從錄影帶複製到記憶卡上的相片影像、將會以 640x480 格式

•

儲存。即使在您將錄製在錄影帶上的相片影像複製到記憶卡中時、

•

他們仍會在錄影帶上存在。

VP-D385( i ))

)

該相片複製功能僅可在

•

➥

第 18 頁

使用此搜尋功能、您僅可自動拍攝來自於您的

•

攝錄放影機中錄製的錄影帶的相片影像、

miniDV

並按順序將他們錄製在記憶卡上。

操作之前

將錄製的錄影帶插入

•

錄影帶。將記憶卡插入攝錄放影機。

•

將選擇開關設定為

1.

按下

MODE

2.

按下

MENU

3.

將會顯示選單清單。

•

向上或向下移動

4.

然後按下

Joystick

向上或向下移動

5.

、然後按下

Copy"

在錄影帶上錄製的所有相片影像均會複製到記憶

•

卡上。

攝錄放影機將自動執行相片影像搜尋、以尋找相片

6.

影像並開始複製。向下移動

7.

當錄影帶用完或記憶卡已滿時複製將會停止複製。

•

TAPE

按鈕以設定按鈕。

Joystick

。

Joystick

M.Player

miniDV

▼

(

模式下操作。

Player

攝錄放影機並回轉此

。

( ).

Player

▼

以選擇

(▲ /

)

▼

以選擇

(▲ /

)

。

以停止複製。

)

模式。 ➥page 79

"Tape"

"Photo

、

Move Select Exit

MENU

Delete

M.Player Mode

M.Play Select

Delete All Protect Print Mark Format

1

/3

Memory

�

Photo

�

Off

1

/3

002

800X600

100-0001

✔

Move Select Exit

MENU

Delete

M.Player Mode

M.Play Select

Delete All Protect Print Mark Format

1

/3

Memory

All Off

All Files

This File 002

002

MARKING IMAGES FOR PRINTING (PRINT MARK)

The print mark function works only in M.Player mode. ➥page 18

•

This camcorder supports the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) print format.

•

You can automatically print images recorded on a memory card with a

•

printer supporting DPOF. Be sure that the M.Play Select is set to Photo in the

•

menu. ➥page 79 There are 2 ways to make a print mark.

•

- "This File": You can set a print mark on the image

- "All Files": To print 1 copy each of all of the stored

1. Set the Select switch to CARD.

2. Press the MODE button to set Player ( ).

•

3. Move the Joystick ( the photo image that you want to mark.

4. Press the MENU button.

•

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Memory"

6. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Print Mark"

7. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select the desired option "All Off", "This File" or "All Files"

8. If you select "This File", move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select the quantity, then press the Joystick.

9. To exit, press the MENU button.

•

Removing the Print Mark

To remove all Print Marks, select "All Off". To remove an individual le’s Print Mark, select the le and set "This File" to "000".

89_ English 臺灣 _89

displayed on the LCD screen. It can be set up to 999.

images.

The last recorded image appears.

The menu list will appear.

, then press the Joystick.

Print mark ( ) indicator and number of prints are displayed.

If the Print Mark is set to "This File", you can set the number of

•

copies from "000" to "999". If the Print Mark is set to "All Files", you can set the number of

•

copies to "001". The "All Files" option may require extended operation time

•

depending on the number of stored images. DPOF supported printers are commercially available.

•

/

) left or right, search for





, then press the Joystick.

標記要列印的影像 (PRINT MARK)

列印標記功能僅可在

•

攝錄放影機支援 DPOF（數位列印順序格式）列印格式。

•

您可以使用支援 DPOF 的印表機來自動列印錄製在記憶卡上的影像。

•

確保將選單中的

•

➥

第 79 頁

製作列印標記的方式有 2 種。

•

-

"This File"

-

"All Files"

將

1.

選擇

按下

2.

最後錄製的影像將會顯示。

•

向左或向右移動

3.

的相片影像。

按下

4.

將會顯示選單清單。

•

向上或向下移動

5. "Memory"

向上或向下移動

6. Mark"

向上或向下移動

7.

項

"All Off"、"This File" 或"All Files"

Joystick

若您選擇

8.

( ▲ / ▼ ) 以選擇數量、然後按下若要結束、可按下

9.

會顯示列印標記

•

模式下操作。➥ 第 18 頁

M.Player

M.Play Select

設定為

: 您可以為顯示在 LCD 螢幕上的影像設

定列印標記。它可設定多達 999 個。

: 為所有儲存的影像各列印一份。

開關設定為

MODE

按鈕。

MENU

、然後按下

按鈕以設定

。

CARD

Player

/



Joystick (

( ▲ / ▼ ) 以選擇

Joystick

( ▲ / ▼ ) 以選擇

Joystick

。

Joystick

( ▲ / ▼ ) 以選擇所需的選

Joystick

( )。



)

。

"This File"

、請向上或向下移動

Joystick

按鈕。

MENU

( )

指示器和列印數量。

Photo

以搜尋您想標記

、然後按下

移除 Print Mark

若要移除所有 Print Marks、請選擇 Mark、可選擇檔案並將

若 Print Mark 被設為 "

•

份數。若 Print Mark 設定為

•

視儲存的影像張數而定、

•

支援 DPOF 的印表機的在市面上可買到

•

"This File"

This File"

"All Files"

。若要移除個別檔案的 Print

"All Off"

設定為

"000"。

、您可以設定從

、您可以將份數設定為

選項可能需要延長操作時間。

"All Files"

"000" 到"999"

"001"。

。

"Print

Joystick

。

的

90_ English

臺灣 _90

AV

MODE

DC IN

DV

POWER

CHG

Move Select Exit

MENU

Remote

M.Player Mode

Clock Set

Beep Sound USB Connect Language

1

/3

System

Computer

✔

Printer

Move Select Exit

MENU

Remote

M.Player Mode

Clock Set

Beep Sound USB Connect Language

1

/3

System

�

On

�

On

�

Computer

�

English

pictbridgeTM (VP-D385( i ) only)

PRINTING YOUR PICTURES – USING THE PICTBRIDGE

PictBridgeTM function works only in M.Player mode. ➥page 18

•

By connecting the camcorder to printers with PictBridge support (sold

•

separately), you can send images from the memory card directly to the printer with a few simple operations. With the PictBridge support, you can control the printer directly through

•

your camcorder in order to print out stored pictures. For direct printing of your stored pictures using the PictBridge function, you must connect your camcorder to a PictBridge printer using a USB cable.

Connecting To a Printer

1. Turn your printer's power off.

2. Slide the POWER switch downwards to turn on the power and set the Select switch to CARD.

3. Press the MODE button to set Player ( ).

4. Press the MENU button.

The menu list will appear.

•

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "System", then press the Joystick.

6. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "USB Connect", then press the Joystick.

7. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Printer", then press the Joystick.

"Computer": Connect to a computer.

•

"Printer": Connect to a printer. (To use the

•

8. Connect your camcorder to the printer using the provided USB cable.

9. Turn your printer power on.

•

PictBridge function, connect to a printer.)

The PictBridge menu screen appears automatically after a short period. The cursor highlights "Print".

pictbridgeTM

( 僅適用於

TM

列印相片–使用

•

TM

PictBridge

透過將攝錄放影機連接到

功能僅可在

可進行幾個簡單操作、將影像從記憶卡直接傳送到印表機。使用機以列印出儲存的相片。若要使用

支援的印表機、即可透過攝錄放影機直接控制印表

PictBridge

相片、您必須使用

連接印表機

關閉印表機電源。

1.

2.

按下

3.

按下

4.

5.

向上或向下移動

6.

向上或向下移動

7.

VP-D385( i ))

PICTBRIDGE

模式下操作。➥第 18 頁

M.Player

PictBridge

纜線將攝錄放影機連接到

USB

向下滑動

設定為

CARD MODE MENU

將會顯示選單清單。

•

向上或向下移動

"System"

Connect"

"Printer"

"Computer"

•

"Printer"

•

使用隨附的

8.

表機。

開啟印表機電源。

9.

•

PictBridge

開關以開啟電源、並將選擇開關

POWER

。

按鈕以設定

按鈕。

Joystick

、然後按下

Joystick

、然後按下

Joystick

、然後按下

: 連接至電腦。

: 連接到印表機。（若要使用

功能、請連接至印表機。）

USB

選單畫面很快將會自動顯示。

PictBridge

游標反白顯示

TM

支援（個別購買）的印表機、

功能直接列印儲存的

印表機。

PictBridge

( ).

Player

以選擇

(▲ / ▼)

。

Joystick

(▲ / ▼)

。

(▲ / ▼)

。

以選擇

"USB

PictBridge

纜線將攝錄放影機連接到印

。

"Print"

臺灣 _91

91_ English

Selecting Images

Move Select Exit

MENU

Copies

M.Player Mode

Print

Date/Time

1

/3

Print

02Num.

Move Select Exit

MENU

Copies

M.Player Mode

Print

Date/Time

1

/3

Print

Off

✔

Date Time Date&Time

Cancel 100-0022

800x600

1

/3

Now printing... [01/01]

Move the Joystick to print.

Setting the Number of Prints

1. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select

2. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to set the

Setting the Date/Time Imprint Option

1. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select

2. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select the

Printing Images

Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Print", then press the Joystick, and selected image  les will be printed.

Canceling the Printing

To cancel the image printing, press Joystick again. The message "Cancel" appears and the image printing will be cancelled.

/

(

) left or right to select an image





Each press of the MENU button toggles between

•

turning PictBridge menu screen on or off.

"Copies", then press the Joystick.

number of prints, then press the Joystick.

"Date/Time", then press the Joystick.

Date/Time display type, then press the Joystick.

Date/Time display type: "Off", "Date", "Time",

•

The Date/Time Imprint option may not be supported by all printers.

•

Check with your printer manufacturer. The "Date/Time" menu cannot be setup if the printer does not support this option. The PictBridge™ is a registered trademark of CIPA (Camera &

•

Imaging Products Association), an image transfer standard developed by Canon, Fuji, HP, Olympus, Seiko Epson, and Sony. PictBridge supporting printers are commercially available.

•

Use the USB cable provided with the camcorder.

•

Use the AC power adapter for your camcorder during PictBridge Direct

•

Printing. Turning your camcorder off during printing might damage data on the memory card. Printing photo images is supported. Moving images are not available for

•

printing. You can set various printing options depending on the printer.

•

Please refer to the user’s manual of the printer for details.

•

"Date&Time"

選擇影像

向左或向右移動

每次按下

•

畫面切換為開啟或關閉。

Joystick

MENU

/





(

)



以選擇影像進行列印。

按鈕時、都會將

PictBridge

設定列印份數

向上或向下移動

1.

向上或向下移動

2.

、然後按下

"Copies"

量、然後按下

Joystick

( ▲ / ▼) 以選擇

。

Joystick

( ▲ / ▼) 以設定列印數

。

設定日期 / 時間壓印選項

向上或向下移動

1.

"Date/Time"

向上或向下移動

2.

/ 時間、然後按下

日期 / 時間

•

Joystick

、然後按下

Joystick

顯示類型：

▼) 以選擇

(▲ /

。

Joystick

▼) 以選擇日期

(▲ /

。

"Off"、"Date" "Time"、"Date&Time"

列印影像

向上或向下移動然後按下

Joystick

、將會列印選取的影像檔案。

(▲ /

▼) 以選擇

取消列印

若要取消影像列印、可再次按下將會顯示

日期 / 時間壓印選項並不受所有印表機支援。請洽詢您的印表機

•

製造商。若印表機不支援此選項、

PictBridge™

•

Canon、Fuji、HP、Olympus、Seiko Epson

傳輸標準。

PictBridge

•

使用攝錄放影機隨附的

•

在

•

在列印期間關閉攝錄放影機電源、可能會損毀記憶卡上的資料。支援列印相片影像。不支援列印動態影像。

•

您可以根據印表機設定不同的列印選項。

•

請參閱印表機的使用者手冊以獲得詳細資訊。

•

是

CIPA

支援的印表機在市面上可買到。

直接列印期間、使用攝錄放影機的交流電源適配器。

PictBridge

訊息、同時將會取消影像列印。

"Cancel"

"Date/Time"

（相機與影像產品協會）的註冊商標、是由

USB

選單可能無法設定。

纜線。

Joystick

和

Sony

。

開發的影像

選單

、

"Print"

、

92_ English

臺灣 _92

IEEE 1394 data transfer

TRANSFERRING IEEE1394 (I.LINK)DV STANDARD DATA CONNECTIONS

Connecting to a DV Device (DVD Recorder, Camcorder, etc.)

Connecting to other standard DV products.

•

- A standard DV connection is quite simple.

- If a product has a DV jack, you can transfer data by connecting to the DV jack using the correct cable. (not supplied)

With a digital connection, video and audio signals are transmitted

•

in digital format, allowing high quality images to be transferred.

Connecting to a PC

If you want to transmit data to a PC, you must install an IEEE 1394

•

add-on card into the PC. (not supplied) The frame rate for moving images is dependent on the capacity of

•

the PC.

System Requirements

CPU: faster Intel® Pentium III™ 450MHz compatible.

•

Operating system: Windows

•

Main memory: more than 64 MB RAM

•

IEEE1394 add-on card or built in IEEE1394 card

•

Operation is not guaranteed for all the recommended computer

•

environments mentioned above. IEEE 1394 is an international standard standardized by the

•

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. DV device that does not complies with the DV standard

•

specication may not supported. Refer to the product documentation of the device to be connected for further details on notes and compatible software applications.

Please be careful since there are two types of DV jacks

WARNING

(4pin, 6pin). This camcorder has a 4pin jack.

®

98SE, ME, 2000, XP, VISTA,

Mac OS (9.1~10.4)

IEEE 1394

IEEE1394 (I.LINK)-DV

傳輸

DV

連接到

•

連接至電腦

•

系統需求

•

警告

裝置（

連接到其他 DV 標準產品。

- 標準的

- 若產品具有

使用數位連接、視訊和聲訊訊號將可透過數位格式傳遞、允許傳輸高品質的影像。

若您要傳遞資料到 PC、您必須在您的 PC 上安裝一張附加介面卡。（未提供）。視訊擷取的幀率將視電腦容量而定。

CPU

作業系統：

主記憶體：多於

IEEE 1394

連接非常簡單。

DV

傳輸資料。（未提供）

DV

：更快的

Intel® Pentium III™ 450MHz Windows® 98SE、ME、2000、XP、VISTA、Mac OS (9.1~10.4)

附加介面卡或內置

不保證在所有上面建議的電腦環境中的操作。

•

IEEE1394

•

可能不支援那些不符合 DV 標準規範的 DV 裝置。

•

請參閱要連線至的裝置的産品文件、以了解有關說明和相容軟體應用程式的詳細資訊。

請留意有兩種類型的 DV 插孔（4 針、6 針）。此攝錄放影機具有 4 針插孔。

資料傳輸

標準資料連接

DVD

錄放影機、攝錄放影機等）

插孔、透過使用正確的纜線連接到 DV 插孔即可

IEEE 1394

相容型。

64 MB RAM

IEEE 1394

是由電氣和電子工程師協會標準化的國際標準。

卡

臺灣 _93

93_ English

Recording with a DV Connection Cable

Models with an ‘i’ sufx do feature DV(IEEE1394)/AV(Analogue) In.

1. Set the Select switch to TAPE. (VP-D385( i ) only)

2. Press the MODE button to set Player ( ).

3. Connect the DV cable (not supplied)

from the DV jack of the camcorder to the DV jack of the other DV device.

Make sure that ( ) is displayed.

4. Press the Recording start/stop button to begin REC PAUSE mode.

"PAUSE" is displayed.

5. Start playback on the other DV device

while you monitor the picture.

6. Press the Recording start/stop button to start recording.

If you want to pause recording momentarily, press the Recording

start/stop button again.

7. To stop recording, move down the Joystick ().

When you transmit data from the camcorder to another DV device, some functions may not work. If this occurs, please reconnect the DV cable or turn the power OFF and ON again. When you transmit data from the camcorder to PC, PC function button is not available in M.Player mode. (VP-D385

( i )

only) Do not use another DV device when using IEEE1394. Do not connect the camcorder to a PC using both DV and USB (VP-D385( i ) only) cables. It may not operate properly. The IEEE1394 cable (DV cable) is sold separately. Moving image software is commercially available. Most DV enabled PCs have a 6 pin jack. In this case, a 6pin/4pin cable is required for the connection. Most DV enabled notebooks and Laptops have a 4 pin socket. Use a 4pin/4pin cable for the connection. DIS and C.Nite features are not available when in DV (IEEE1394) mode. If DV (IEEE1394) mode is set, DIS and C.Nite modes will be released. Search (Forward/Reverse) is not available when in DV (IEEE1394) mode. When using this camcorder as a recorder, the pictures that appear on a monitor may seem uneven, however recorded pictures will not be affected.

•

MODE

AV

DV

POWER

CH

G

VOL

PC

IEEE1394 cable

(DV cable)

Camcorder

DV Jack

使用 DV 連接纜線進行錄製

含有

‘i’

字尾的型號有 DV(IEEE1394)/AV( 類比 ) In。

1.

 將選擇開關設定為

TAPE

。（僅適用於 VP-D385(i))

2.

 按下

MODE

按鈕以設定

Player

(

).

3.

 將

DV

纜線（未提供）從攝錄放

影機的

DV

插孔連接到其他

DV



裝置的

DV

插孔。

確保顯示(

)。

4.

 按

錄製開始 / 停止

按鈕以開始

錄

製暫停

模式。

"PAUSE"

將會顯示。

5.

 開始其他

DV

裝置上的播放、



同時監視畫面。

6.

 按下

錄製開始 / 停止

按鈕以開始

錄製。

如果您要暫時暫停錄製、請再次按

播放開始 / 停止

按鈕。

7.

若要停止播放、可向下移動

Joystick

(



)

.



當您從攝錄放影機傳遞資料到另一架

DV

裝置時、一些功能可能無法操作。 若發生這種情形、請重新連接

DV

纜線或關閉電源然後再打開。

當您從攝錄放影機傳遞資料到電腦時、電腦功能按鈕不可在

M.Player

模式中使用。( 僅適用於

VP-D385

( i )

)

請勿在使用

IEEE1394

時使用其他DV裝置。

不要同時使用DV和

USB

( 僅適用於

VP-D385( i )

)纜線將攝錄放

影機連接到電腦。這可能導致不正常的操作。

IEEE1394

纜線（DV纜線）需要個別購買。動態影像軟體可在市面上買到。大多數啟用

DV

的電腦具有6針插孔。在這裡、需要使用6 針 /4 針纜線來進行連接。大多數啟用

DV

的筆記型和膝上型電腦具有4針插座。



使用4 針 /4 針纜線來進行連接。

DIS

和色彩夜拍功能不可在

DV (IEEE 1394)

模式中使用。



若設定

DV (IEEE1394)

模式、

DIS

和

C.Nite

模式將被解除。

搜尋（前進 / 倒退）功能在進行

DV (IEEE 1394)

模式時不可用。在把攝錄放影機當作錄制機使用時、出現在顯示器上的畫面可能看起來不一致、不過錄製畫面並不會受影響。

•

MODE

AV

DV

POWER

CH

G

VOL

PC

DV Jack

IEEE1394 cable

(DV cable)

Camcorder

94_ English

臺灣 _94

USB interface (VP-D385(i) only)

USING USB INTERFACE

Transferring a Digital Image through a USB Connection

The camcorder supports both USB 1.1 and 2.0 standards.

•

(Depends on the PC specication) You can transfer a recorded le on a Memory Card to your PC via a USB

•

connection. If you transfer data to a PC, you need to install the software

•

(DV Driver, Video Codec, DirectX 9.0) supplied with the Camcorder.

USB Connection Speed depending on the System

High speed USB connection is supported by Microsoft (Windows) device drivers only.

Windows 2000 - High speed USB on a system with

•

Service Pack 4 or later installed. Windows XP - High speed USB on a system with Service Pack 1 or later

•

Windows VISTA - High speed USB on a system with Service Pack 1 or

•

System Requirements

CPU Intel® Pentium 4™, 2GHz

OS(Operating System)

Memory 512MB HDD capacity 2GB or more Resolution 1024 x 768 dots 24bit Colour USB USB2.0 High Speed

USB interface is not supported on Macintosh operating systems.

•

System requirements mentioned above are recommendations. Even on

•

a system that satises the requirements may not ensure the operation

depending on the system.

installed.

later installed.

Windows System

Windows® 2000/XP/VISTA * Standard installation is recommended. Operation may not assured if the above OS has been upgraded.

USB 介面

（僅適用於

USB

使用

透過

•

系統需求

（作業系統）

•

介面

USB

連接傳輸數位影像

攝錄放影機支持您可以透過若您傳輸資料到電腦、您將需要安裝攝錄放影機隨附的軟體（動程式、視訊轉碼器、

USB

高速程式支援。

•

CPU Intel® Pentium 4™, 2GHz

OS

Memory 512MB

硬碟機容量 2GB 或更大

解析度 1024 x 768 點 24 位元色

USB

在

Macintosh

上述系統只是建議。即使在滿足要求的系統上、也可能無法保證是否能操作。

Windows

Windows® 2000/XP/VISTA *

如果上述作業系統已升級、則可能無法正常操作。

USB2.0

作業系統中不支援

VP-D385( i ))

1.1 和 2.0 標準。（視電腦規格而定）。

USB

連接將記憶卡中的錄製檔案傳輸到電腦。

）。

DirectX 9.0

連接的速度取決於系統

連接僅可由

USB

Windows 2000 –

系統可提供高速

Windows XP –

統可提供高速

Windows VISTA –

的系統可提供高速

系統

建議採用標準安裝。

高速

Microsoft (Windows)

安裝有

Service Pack 4

。

USB

安裝有

Service Pack 1

。

USB

安裝有

Service Pack 1

。

USB

介面。

USB

DV

裝置驅動

或以上的

或以上的系

或以上

驅

臺灣 _95

95_ English

On a slower PC than recommended, movie playback may

•

not be smooth or video editing may take a long time. On a slower PC than recommended, movie playback may

•

skip frames or operate unexpectedly. Intel® Pentium III™ or Pentium 4™ is a trademark of the

•

Intel Corporation. Windows® is a registered trademark of the Microsoft®

•

Corporation. All other brands and names are property of their respective

•

owners. Operations are not guaranteed for all of the recommended

•

computer environments mentioned above. Do not connect the camcorder to a PC using both DV and

•

USB cables. It may not operate properly. In M.Cam or M.Player mode, be sure that the memory card

•

is inserted into camcorder before connecting USB cable. If no memory card or an unformatted memory card is

•

inserted, PC will not recognise your camcorder as a removable disk. If you disconnect the USB cable from the PC or the

•

camcorder during the data transfer, the data transfer will stop and the data may be damaged. If you connect the USB cable to a PC using a USB HUB or

•

with other devices at the same time, it may cause conict

and may not work properly. If this occurs, remove all other USB devices and try the connection again.

在比建議慢的電腦上、影片播放可能不順暢或視訊編

•

輯可能需要較長時間。在比建議慢的電腦上、影片播放可能會跳幀或未能如

•

常操作。

Intel® Pentium III™ 或 Pentium 4™ 是 Intel

•

Corporation Windows® 是 Microsoft® Corporation

•

所有其他品牌和名稱是他們各自所有者的財產。

•

不保證在所有上面建議的電腦環境中的操作。

•

不要同時使用

•

的商標。

DV 和 USB

的註冊商標。

纜線將攝錄放影機連接到電腦。這可能導致不正常的操作。在

M.Cam 或 M.Player

•

模式中、確保在連接

USB

線前已將記憶卡放入攝錄放影機。若沒有放入或放入了未格式化的記憶卡、

•

PC

不會把攝錄放影機識別為可卸式磁碟。若您在資料傳輸期間從電腦或攝錄放影機拔下

•

纜線、資料傳輸會停止、而資料可能損壞。若您使用

•

集線器或和其他裝置同時將

USB

連接到電腦、將可能造成衝突並無法正確操作。如果發生此情況、請移除所有其他

裝置、然後再次

USB

嘗試連接。

纜

USB

纜線

96_ English

臺灣 _96

Move Select Exit

MENU

Remote

M.Player Mode

Clock Set

Beep Sound USB Connetct Language

1

/3

System

Computer

✔

Printer

Move Select Exit

MENU

Remote

M.Player Mode

Clock Set

Beep Sound USB Connetct Language

1

/3

System

�

On

�

On

�

Computer

�

English

BA

TT .

C

H

G

MODE

TAPECARD

USB interface (VP-D385( i ) only)

SELECTING THE USB DEVICE (USB CONNECT)

USB connect function works only in M.Player mode. ➥page 18

•

Using the USB cable, you can connect your camcorder to a

•

computer to copy your moving images and photo images from the memory card, or to a printer to print your images.

1. Set the Select switch to CARD.

2. Press the MODE button to set Player ( ).

3. Press the MENU button.

The menu list will appear.

•

4. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "System", then press the Joystick.

5. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "USB Connect", then press the Joystick.

6. Move the Joystick (▲ / ▼) up or down to select "Computer" or "Printer", then press the Joystick.

You can select "Computer" to use the

•

camcorder as a web camera, USB Stream or removable disk. You can select "Printer" to use the Pictbridge

•

feature. ➥page 90

7. To exit, press the MENU button.

USB 介面

（僅適用於

USB

選擇

•

裝置（

連接功能僅可在

USB

透過使用憶卡中的影片和相片影像、或將其連接到印表機上以列印您的影像。

纜線、您可以將攝錄放影機連接到電腦上以複製記

USB

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

VP-D385( i ))

USB

連接）

模式下操作 ➥第 18 頁

M.Player

將選擇開關設定為

按下

MODE

按下

MENU

將會顯示選單清單。

•

向上或向下移動

"System"

向上或向下移動

"USB Connect"

向上或向下移動

"Computer"或"Printer"

您可以選擇

•

網路攝相機、您也可以選擇

•

➥

第 90 頁

若要結束、可按下

CARD

按鈕以設定

按鈕。

Joystick

、然後按下

Joystick

、然後按下

Joystick

"Computer"

USB

"Printer"

MENU

。

( ).

Player

(▲ / ▼) 以選擇

。

Joystick

以選擇

(▲ / ▼)

Joystick

以選擇

(▲ / ▼)

、然後按下

Joystick

以將攝錄放影機用作

串流或可卸式磁碟。

以使用

Pictbridge

按鈕。

。

功能

SAMSUNG VP-D3840, VP-D384, VP-D3810, VP-D381 User Manual [ch]

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual